CNCelite 8058 8060 8065 8070 Hardware Configuration

You might also like

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 300

CNCelite 8058/8060

8065/8070

Hardware configuration.

Ref: 2305
TRANSLATION OF THE ORIGINAL MANUAL MACHINE SAFETY
This manual is a translation of the original manual. This manual, as well as the It is up to the machine manufacturer to make sure that the safety of the machine
documents derived from it, have been drafted in Spanish. In the event of any is enabled in order to prevent personal injury and damage to the CNC or to the
contradictions between the document in Spanish and its translations, the wording products connected to it. On start-up and while validating CNC parameters, it
in the Spanish version shall prevail. The original manual will be labeled with the checks the status of the following safety elements. If any of them is disabled, the
text "ORIGINAL MANUAL". CNC shows the following warning message.
• Feedback alarm for analog axes.
• Software limits for analog and sercos linear axes.
• Following error monitoring for analog and sercos axes (except the spindle)
both at the CNC and at the drives.
• Tendency test on analog axes.
FAGOR AUTOMATION shall not be held responsible for any personal injuries or
physical damage caused or suffered by the CNC resulting from any of the safety
elements being disabled.

HARDWARE EXPANSIONS
FAGOR AUTOMATION shall not be held responsible for any personal injuries or
physical damage caused or suffered by the CNC resulting from any hardware
manipulation by personnel unauthorized by Fagor Automation.
If the CNC hardware is modified by personnel unauthorized by Fagor
Automation, it will no longer be under warranty.

BLANK PAGE
COMPUTER VIRUSES
FAGOR AUTOMATION guarantees that the software installed contains no
computer viruses. It is up to the user to keep the unit virus free in order to
guarantee its proper operation. Computer viruses at the CNC may cause it to
malfunction.
FAGOR AUTOMATION shall not be held responsible for any personal injuries or
physical damage caused or suffered by the CNC due a computer virus in the
system.
If a computer virus is found in the system, the unit will no longer be under warranty.

DUAL-USE PRODUCTS
Products manufactured by FAGOR AUTOMATION since April 1st 2014 will
include "-MDU" in their identification if they are included on the list of dual-use
products according to regulation UE 428/2009 and require an export license
depending on destination.

It is possible that CNC can execute more functions than those described in its
associated documentation; however, Fagor Automation does not guarantee the
validity of those applications. Therefore, except under the express permission
from Fagor Automation, any CNC application that is not described in the
documentation must be considered as "impossible". In any case, Fagor
Automation shall not be held responsible for any personal injuries or physical
All rights reserved. No part of this documentation may be transmitted, damage caused or suffered by the CNC if it is used in any way other than as
transcribed, stored in a backup device or translated into another language explained in the related documentation.
without Fagor Automation’s consent. Unauthorized copying or distributing of this
The content of this manual and its validity for the product described here has been
software is prohibited.
verified. Even so, involuntary errors are possible, hence no absolute match is
The information described in this manual may be subject to changes due to guaranteed. However, the contents of this document are regularly checked and
technical modifications. Fagor Automation reserves the right to change the updated implementing the necessary corrections in a later edition. We appreciate
contents of this manual without prior notice. your suggestions for improvement.
All the trade marks appearing in the manual belong to the corresponding owners. The examples described in this manual are for learning purposes. Before using
The use of these marks by third parties for their own purpose could violate the them in industrial applications, they must be properly adapted making sure that
rights of the owners. the safety regulations are fully met.

ꞏ2ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

INDEX

About this manual. ........................................................................................................................ 9


About the product. .......................................................................................................................11
EC Declaration of Conformity, warranty conditions and quality certificates. ............................... 17
Safety conditions. ....................................................................................................................... 19
Returning conditions. .................................................................................................................. 23
CNC maintenance. ..................................................................................................................... 25
New Features. ............................................................................................................................ 27

CHAPTER 1 PREVIOUS INFORMATION.

CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURATION.

2.1 Central unit. ................................................................................................................... 31


2.2 Central unit + Monitor. ................................................................................................... 31
2.3 Central unit + Monitor + Keyboard. ................................................................................ 32
2.4 Central unit + Monitor + Keyboard and Operator panel. ................................................ 32
2.5 Monitor. ......................................................................................................................... 33
2.6 Operator panels. ........................................................................................................... 34
2.7 CAN keyboard. .............................................................................................................. 35
2.8 USB keyboard. .............................................................................................................. 35
2.9 CAN remote modules..................................................................................................... 36
2.10 EtherCAT remote modules. ........................................................................................... 37
2.11 General diagram (8058 integrated model). .................................................................... 38
2.12 General diagram (8060, 8065 and 8070 integrated models). ........................................ 39
2.13 General diagram (in-cabinet model). ............................................................................. 40

CHAPTER 3 CENTRAL UNIT (CPU) ENCLOSURE.

3.1 Calculation of the surface needed for heat dissipation. ................................................. 43

CHAPTER 4 CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).

4.1 Specifications................................................................................................................. 47
4.1.1 Conditions of acceptabity for NRTL certification. ...................................................... 49
4.2 Dimensions. CNC8058. ................................................................................................. 50
4.3 Dimensions. CNC 8060/8065/8070. .............................................................................. 51
4.3.1 QC-C##-10K. ............................................................................................................ 51
4.3.2 QC-C##-10H / QC-C##-10HT. ................................................................................ 52
4.3.3 QC-C##-10V / QC-C##-10VT. ................................................................................. 53
4.3.4 QC-C##-15................................................................................................................. 54
4.3.5 QC-C##-15AT. ........................................................................................................... 55
4.4 Enclosure and securing of the modules......................................................................... 56
4.4.1 Ambient characteristics of the enclosure. .................................................................. 56
4.4.2 Enclosure design. ...................................................................................................... 56
4.4.3 Securing the module. ................................................................................................. 60
4.5 Power supply for the module. ....................................................................................... 61
4.5.1 Protection against over-voltage and reverse voltage. ................................................ 61
4.5.2 Voltage supply at 24 V DC. ........................................................................................ 61
4.5.3 Power supply via UPS................................................................................................ 61
4.5.4 Ground connection..................................................................................................... 61
4.5.5 Power supply requirements........................................................................................ 62
4.5.6 Connection of the power supply to the line voltage. .................................................. 63 CNCelite
4.5.7 NOT recommended circuits. ...................................................................................... 64
4.6 Non-volatile RAM (FRAM). ............................................................................................ 65 8058 8060
4.7 Hardware functionality (connectors). ............................................................................. 65 8065 8070
4.7.1 Front of the monitor. .................................................................................................. 65
4.7.2 Rear. .......................................................................................................................... 66
4.8 Technical/electrical characteristics of the inputs and outputs. ....................................... 76
4.8.1 Digital inputs............................................................................................................... 76 REF: 2305
4.8.2 Digital outputs. .......................................................................................................... 76
4.8.3 Analog outputs. .......................................................................................................... 76
4.8.4 Feedback inputs......................................................................................................... 77
4.9 Connections. ................................................................................................................. 79
4.9.1 Ground connection. ................................................................................................... 79

ꞏ3ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

4.9.2 Connecting the relay for the emergency chain. ......................................................... 80


4.9.3 Connecting the USB2.0 port. .................................................................................... 80
4.9.4 Feedback connection................................................................................................. 81
4.9.5 Handwheel connection (only QC-C##-10K). .............................................................. 82
4.9.6 Probe connection. ...................................................................................................... 84
4.9.7 Connection to an Ethernet network............................................................................ 87
4.9.8 EtherCAT bus. .......................................................................................................... 88
4.9.9 CAN bus..................................................................................................................... 91
4.9.10 Sercos III bus. ........................................................................................................... 94

CHAPTER 5 CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF VESA MOUNTING).

5.1 Specifications................................................................................................................. 98
5.1.1 Conditions of acceptabity for NRTL certification. .................................................... 100
5.2 Dimensions. ................................................................................................................ 101
5.3 Enclosure and securing of the modules....................................................................... 102
5.3.1 Ambient characteristics of the cabinet. .................................................................... 102
5.3.2 Cabinet design. ........................................................................................................ 102
5.3.3 Ventilation. ............................................................................................................... 102
5.3.4 Securing the module. ............................................................................................... 103
5.4 VESA mount. ............................................................................................................... 104
5.5 Power supply for the module. ..................................................................................... 105
5.5.1 Protection against over-voltage and reverse voltage. .............................................. 105
5.5.2 Voltage supply at 24 V DC....................................................................................... 105
5.5.3 Power supply via UPS. ............................................................................................ 105
5.5.4 Ground connection................................................................................................... 105
5.5.5 Specs of the power supply....................................................................................... 106
5.5.6 Connection of the power supply to the line voltage. ............................................... 107
5.5.7 NOT recommended circuits. .................................................................................... 108
5.6 Non-volatile RAM (FRAM). .......................................................................................... 109
5.7 Hardware functionality (connectors). ........................................................................... 110
5.7.1 Front. ....................................................................................................................... 110
5.7.2 Top. ......................................................................................................................... 111
5.7.3 Bottom. .................................................................................................................... 111
5.7.4 Connector identification. ......................................................................................... 112
5.8 Technical/electrical characteristics of the inputs and outputs. ..................................... 120
5.8.1 Digital inputs. ........................................................................................................... 120
5.8.2 Digital outputs. ......................................................................................................... 120
5.8.3 Analog outputs. ........................................................................................................ 120
5.8.4 Feedback inputs....................................................................................................... 121
5.9 Connections................................................................................................................. 123
5.9.1 Ground connection. ................................................................................................. 123
5.9.2 Connecting the USB2.0 port. .................................................................................. 123
5.9.3 Connecting the DVI-D video output. ........................................................................ 124
5.9.4 Connecting the relay for the emergency chain. ....................................................... 124
5.9.5 Feedback connection............................................................................................... 125
5.9.6 Probe connection. .................................................................................................... 126
5.9.7 Connection to an Ethernet network.......................................................................... 129
5.9.8 EtherCAT bus. ........................................................................................................ 130
5.9.9 Bus Sercos-III. ........................................................................................................ 133
5.9.10 CAN bus................................................................................................................... 135

CHAPTER 6 MONITOR-18 MULTITOUCH.

1.1 Specifications............................................................................................................... 140


1.2 General diagram. ......................................................................................................... 141
1.3 Dimensions. ................................................................................................................ 142
1.4 Enclosure and mounting of the module. ...................................................................... 143
1.4.1 Enclosure design. .................................................................................................... 143
1.4.2 Securing the module. ............................................................................................... 144
1.5 Voltage supply for the module. .................................................................................... 146
1.6 Configuring the video signal from the monitor. ............................................................ 147
CNCelite 1.7 Connectors. ................................................................................................................ 148
8058 8060 1.8 Cable characteristics. .................................................................................................. 151
1.8.1 VGA video signal. .................................................................................................... 151
8065 8070 1.8.2 DVI-D video signal. ................................................................................................. 152
1.9 OSD (On Screen Display) menu.................................................................................. 153
1.9.1 Using the rear keyboard with the OSD menu. ......................................................... 153
REF: 2305 1.9.2 OSD menu. .............................................................................................................. 154
1.9.3 Locks and unlocks the OSD menu........................................................................... 159

CHAPTER 7 MONITOR-21 MULTITOUCH.

7.1 Specifications............................................................................................................... 162

ꞏ4ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

7.2 General diagram. ........................................................................................................ 163


7.3 Dimensions. ................................................................................................................ 164
7.4 Enclosure and mounting of the module. ...................................................................... 165
7.4.1 Enclosure design...................................................................................................... 165
7.4.2 Securing the module. ............................................................................................... 166
7.5 Voltage supply for the module. .................................................................................... 168
7.6 Configuring the video signal from the monitor. ............................................................ 169
7.7 Connectors. ................................................................................................................. 170
7.8 Cable characteristics.................................................................................................... 173
7.8.1 VGA video signal...................................................................................................... 173
7.9 OSD (On Screen Display) menu.................................................................................. 174
7.9.1 Using the rear keyboard with the OSD menu........................................................... 174
7.9.2 OSD menu. .............................................................................................................. 175
7.9.3 Locks and unlocks the OSD menu........................................................................... 180

CHAPTER 8 HORIZONTAL KEYB.

8.1 Specifications. ............................................................................................................. 182


8.1.1 Conditions of acceptabity for NRTL certification. .................................................... 183
8.2 General diagram. ........................................................................................................ 184
8.3 Dimensions. ................................................................................................................ 184
8.4 Enclosure and mounting of the module. ...................................................................... 185
8.4.1 Ambient characteristics of the enclosure. ................................................................ 185
8.4.2 Enclosure design. .................................................................................................... 185
8.4.3 Securing the module. ............................................................................................... 186
8.5 Power supply for the module. ...................................................................................... 187
8.6 Hardware functionalities............................................................................................... 188
8.6.1 Ground connection. ................................................................................................. 188
8.6.2 Rear connectors. ..................................................................................................... 188
8.7 Bus CAN (CANopen protocol). .................................................................................... 191
8.7.1 Identification of the modules at the bus.................................................................... 192
8.7.2 Identification of the first and last elements of the bus. ............................................. 193
8.7.3 CAN bus type selection (CANopen)......................................................................... 193
8.7.4 Selecting the speed for the CANopen bus. .............................................................. 193

CHAPTER 9 VERTICAL KEYB.

9.1 Specifications. ............................................................................................................. 196


9.1.1 Conditions of acceptabity for NRTL certification. .................................................... 197
9.2 General diagram. ........................................................................................................ 198
9.3 Dimensions. ................................................................................................................ 199
9.4 Enclosure and mounting of the module. ...................................................................... 200
9.4.1 Ambient characteristics of the enclosure. ................................................................ 200
9.4.2 Enclosure design. .................................................................................................... 200
9.4.3 Securing the module. ............................................................................................... 202
9.5 Power supply for the module. ...................................................................................... 203
9.6 Hardware functionalities............................................................................................... 204
9.6.1 Ground connection. ................................................................................................. 204
9.6.2 Rear connectors. ..................................................................................................... 204
9.7 Bus CAN (CANopen protocol). .................................................................................... 207
9.7.1 Identification of the modules at the bus.................................................................... 208
9.7.2 Identification of the first and last elements of the bus. ............................................. 209
9.7.3 CAN bus type selection (CANopen)......................................................................... 209
9.7.4 Selecting the speed for the CANopen bus. .............................................................. 209

CHAPTER 10 HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0 + TOUCHPAD.

10.1 Specifications. ............................................................................................................. 212


10.1.1 Conditions of acceptabity for NRTL certification. .................................................... 213
10.2 General diagram. ........................................................................................................ 214
10.3 Dimensions. ................................................................................................................ 215
10.4 Enclosure and mounting of the module. ...................................................................... 216 CNCelite
10.4.1 Enclosure design. .................................................................................................... 216
10.4.2 Securing the module. ............................................................................................... 217 8058 8060
10.5 Voltage supply for the module. .................................................................................... 218 8065 8070
10.6 Connectors................................................................................................................... 219
10.7 Selecting the language and the keyboard distribution. ................................................ 219
10.8 Using the Fagor logo key. ........................................................................................... 221
10.9 Numeric keypad. .......................................................................................................... 221 REF: 2305
10.10 Touchpad (touch screen). ........................................................................................... 222

CHAPTER 11 HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0-A.

11.1 Specifications. ............................................................................................................. 224

ꞏ5ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

11.1.1 Conditions of acceptabity for NRTL certification. .................................................... 225


11.2 General diagram. ........................................................................................................ 226
11.3 Dimensions. ................................................................................................................ 227
11.4 Enclosure and mounting of the module. ...................................................................... 228
11.4.1 Enclosure design. ................................................................................................... 228
11.4.2 Securing the module. ............................................................................................... 229
11.5 Power supply for the module. ...................................................................................... 230
11.6 Connectors. ................................................................................................................. 231
11.7 Selecting the language and the keyboard distribution. ................................................ 231
11.8 Using the Fagor logo key. ........................................................................................... 233
11.9 Numeric keypad........................................................................................................... 233
11.10 Touchpad (touch screen). ........................................................................................... 234

CHAPTER 12 OP-PANEL-329.

12.1 Specifications. ............................................................................................................. 236


12.1.1 Conditions of acceptabity for NRTL certification. .................................................... 237
12.2 General diagram. ........................................................................................................ 238
12.3 Dimensions. ................................................................................................................ 239
12.4 Enclosure and mounting of the module. ...................................................................... 240
12.4.1 Ambient characteristics of the enclosure. ................................................................ 240
12.4.2 Enclosure design. ................................................................................................... 240
12.4.3 Securing the module. ............................................................................................... 241
12.5 Power supply for the module. ...................................................................................... 242
12.6 Hardware functionalities. ............................................................................................. 243
12.6.1 Ground connection. ................................................................................................. 243
12.6.2 Rear connectors. ..................................................................................................... 243
12.7 Handwheel connection. ............................................................................................... 247
12.8 Bus CAN (CANopen protocol). .................................................................................... 248
12.8.1 Identification of the modules at the bus. .................................................................. 249
12.8.2 Identification of the first and last elements of the bus. ............................................. 250
12.8.3 CAN bus type selection (CANopen)......................................................................... 250
12.8.4 Selecting the speed for the CANopen bus............................................................... 250

CHAPTER 13 OP-PANEL / OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE.

13.1 Specifications. ............................................................................................................. 252


13.1.1 Conditions of acceptabity for NRTL certification. .................................................... 253
13.2 General diagram. ........................................................................................................ 254
13.3 Dimensions. ................................................................................................................ 255
13.4 Enclosure and mounting of the module. ...................................................................... 256
13.4.1 Ambient characteristics of the enclosure. ................................................................ 256
13.4.2 Enclosure design. ................................................................................................... 256
13.4.3 Securing the module. ............................................................................................... 257
13.5 Power supply for the module. ...................................................................................... 258
13.6 Hardware functionalities. ............................................................................................. 259
13.6.1 Ground connection. ................................................................................................. 259
13.6.2 Rear connectors. ..................................................................................................... 259
13.7 Handwheel connection. ............................................................................................... 263
13.8 Bus CAN (CANopen protocol). .................................................................................... 264
13.8.1 Identification of the modules at the bus. .................................................................. 265
13.8.2 Identification of the first and last elements of the bus. ............................................. 266
13.8.3 CAN bus type selection (CANopen)......................................................................... 266
13.8.4 Selecting the speed for the CANopen bus............................................................... 266

CHAPTER 14 OP PANEL-A / OP PANEL+SPDL RATE-A.

14.1 Specifications. ............................................................................................................. 268


14.1.1 Conditions of acceptabity. ....................................................................................... 269
14.2 General diagram. ........................................................................................................ 270
14.3 Dimensions. ................................................................................................................ 271
CNCelite 14.4 Enclosure and mounting of the module. ...................................................................... 272
14.4.1 Ambient characteristics of the enclosure. ................................................................ 272
8058 8060 14.4.2 Enclosure design. ................................................................................................... 272
8065 8070 14.4.3 Securing the module. ............................................................................................... 273
14.5 Power supply for the module. ...................................................................................... 274
14.6 Hardware functionalities. ............................................................................................. 274
14.6.1 Ground connection. ................................................................................................. 274
REF: 2305 14.6.2 Rear connectors. ..................................................................................................... 275
14.7 Handwheel connection. ............................................................................................... 279
14.8 Connecting the emergency stop button ....................................................................... 280
14.9 CAN Bus (CANopen protocol). .................................................................................... 281
14.9.1 Module identification at the bus. .............................................................................. 282
14.9.2 Identification of the first and last elements of the bus. Line terminating resistor...... 283

ꞏ6ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

14.9.3 CAN bus type selection (CANopen)......................................................................... 283


14.9.4 Selecting the speed for the CANopen bus. .............................................................. 283

CHAPTER 15 CNC-FPS.

15.1 Specifications. ............................................................................................................. 286


15.2 Dimensions. ................................................................................................................ 286
15.3 Securing the module. ................................................................................................... 287
15.4 Protection fuse. ........................................................................................................... 287
15.5 UPS connection diagram. ............................................................................................ 288

CHAPTER 16 CNC FPS-CAP.

16.1 Specifications. ............................................................................................................. 292


16.2 Dimensions. ................................................................................................................ 293
16.3 Securing the module. .................................................................................................. 293
16.4 Connection to the CNC. .............................................................................................. 295

CHAPTER 17 INSTALLING A SENSOR FOR GAP CONTROL (LASER MODEL).

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ7ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ8ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

ABOUT THIS MANUAL.

Title. Hardware configuration.

Models. CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

Type of documentation. OEM manual. This manual describes the main CNC hardware;
models, dimensions, connectors, etc.

Remarks.

Always use the manual reference associated with the software version
or a later manual reference. You can download the latest manual
reference from the download section on our website.

Limitations.

The availability of some of the features described in this manual are


dependent on the acquired software options. Moreover, the machine
manufacturer (OEM) customizes the CNC performance of each
machine using the machine parameters and the PLC. Because of this,
the manual may describe features that are not available for the CNC
or the machine. Consult the machine manufacturer for the available
features.

Electronic document. man_elite_58_60_65_70_hard.pdf. Manual available from the


download section of our website.

Language. English [EN]. Refer to our website, download area, the languages
available for each manual.

Date of publication. May, 2023

Manual reference Ref: 2305

Associated version. v2.22.01

Responsibility exemption. The information described in this manual may be subject to changes
due to technical modifications. Fagor Automation reserves the right to
change the contents of this manual without prior notice.

Trademarks. This manual may contain third-party trademarks or trade names,


however, they do not have them associated ® or ™ symbols. All the
trade marks appearing in the manual belong to the corresponding
owners. The use of these marks by third parties for their own purpose
could violate the rights of the owners. CNCelite
8058 8060
Website / Email. http://www.fagorautomation.com 8065 8070
Email: contact@fagorautomation.es

REF: 2305

ꞏ9ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ10ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

About the product.

SOFTWARE OPTIONS.

Some of the features described in this manual are dependent on the acquired software options. The active
software options for the CNC can be consulted in the diagnostics mode (accessible from the task window
by pressing [CTRL] [A]), under software options. Consult Fagor Automation regarding the software options
available for your model.

Software option Description.

SOFT ADDIT AXES Option to add axes to the default configuration.

SOFT ADDIT SPINDLES Option to add spindles to the default configuration.

SOFT ADDIT TOOL MAGAZ Option to add magazines to the default configuration.

SOFT ADDIT CHANNELS Option to add channels to the default configuration.

SOFT 4 AXES INTERPOLATION LIMIT Limited to 4 interpolated axes.

SOFT DIGITAL SERCOS Option for a Sercos digital bus.

SOFT THIRD PARTY DRIVES Option to use EtherCAT third party drives.

SOFT THIRD PARTY I/Os Option to use third party I/O modules.

SOFT OPEN SYSTEM Option for open systems. The CNC is a closed system that CNCelite
offers all the features needed to machine parts.
Nevertheless, at times there are some customers who use 8058 8060
third-party applications to take measurements, perform 8065 8070
statistics or other tasks apart from machining a part.
This feature must be active when installing this type of
application, even if they are Office files. Once the
application has been installed, it is recommended to close REF: 2305
the CNC in order to prevent the operators from installing
other kinds of applications that could slow the system
down and affect the machining operations.

ꞏ11ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

Software option Description.

SOFT i4.0 CONNECTIVITY PACK Options for Industry 4.0 connectivity. This option provides
various data exchange standards (for example, OPC UA),
which allows the CNC (and therefore the machine tool) to
be integrated into a data acquisition network or into a MES
or SCADA system.
SOFT EDIT/SIMUL Option to enable edisimu mode (edition and simulation)
on the CNC, which can edit, modify and simulate part
programs.

SOFT DUAL-PURPOSE (M-T) Option to enable the dual-purpose machine, which allows
milling and turning cycles. On Y-axis lathes, this option
allows for pockets, bosses and even irregular pockets with
islands to be made during milling cycles. On a C-axis mill,
this option allows turning cycles to be used.

SOFT TOOL RADIUS COMP Option to enable radius compensation. This


compensation programs the contour to be machined
based on part dimensions without taking into account the
dimensions of the tool that will be used later on. This
avoids having to calculate and define the tool paths based
on the tool radius.

SOFT PROFILE EDITOR Option to enable the profile editor in edisimu mode and in
the cycle editor. This editor can graphically, and in a
guided way, define rectangular, circular profiles or any
profile made up of straight and circular sections an it can
also import dxf files. After defining the profile, the CNC
generates the required blocks and add them to the
program.

SOFT HD GRAPHICS High definition solid 3D graphics for the execution and
In a multi-channel system, this feature requires the MP- simulation of part-programs and canned cycles of the
PLUS (83700201) processor. editor. During machining, the HD graphics display, in real
time, the tool removing the material from the part, allowing
the condition of the part to be seen at all times. These
graphics are required for the collision control (FCAS).

SOFT IIP CONVERSATIONAL The IIP (Interactive Icon-based Pages) mode, or


conversational mode, works with the CNC in a graphical
and guided way based on predefined cycles. There is no
need to work with part programs, have any previous
programming knowledge or be familiar with Fagor CNCs.
Working in conversational mode is easier than in ISO
mode, as it ensures proper data entry and minimizes the
number of operations to be defined.

SOFT RTCP Option to enable dynamic RTCP (Rotating Tool Center


This feature requires the MP-PLUS (83700201) Point) required to machine with 4, 5 and 6 axis kinematics;
processor. for example, angular and orthogonal spindles, tilting
tables, etc. The RTCP orientation of the tool may be
changed without modifying the position occupied by the
tool tip on the part.

SOFT C AXIS Option to enable C-axis kinematics and associated


canned cycles. The machine parameters of each axis or
spindle indicate whether it can operate as a C axis or not.
For this reason, it is not necessary to add specific axes to
the configuration.

SOFT Y AXIS Option to enable lathe Y-axis kinematics and associated


canned cycles.

SOFT TANDEM AXES Option to enable tandem axle control. A tandem axis
CNCelite consists of two motors mechanically coupled to each
other forming a single transmission system (axis or
8058 8060 spindle). A tandem axis helps provide the necessary
8065 8070 torque to move an axis when a single motor is not capable
of supplying enough torque to do it.
When activating this feature, it should be kept in mind that
for each tandem axis of the machine, another axis must
REF: 2305
be added to the entire configuration. For example, on a
large 3-axis lathe (X Z and tailstock), if the tailstock is a
tandem axis, the final purchase order for the machine
must indicate 4 axes.

ꞏ12ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

Software option Description.

SOFT SYNCHRONISM Option to enable the synchronization of paired axes and


spindles, in speed or position, and through a given ratio.

SOFT KINEMATIC CALIBRATION Option to enable tool calibration. For the first time, this
kinematics calibration allows for the kinematics offsets to
be calculated using various approximate data and, also,
from time to time to correct any possible deviations
caused by day-to-day machining operations.

SOFT 60 HSSA I MACHINING SYSTEM Option to enable the HSSA-I (High Speed Surface
Accuracy) algorithm for high speed machining (HSC).
This new HSSA algorithm allows for high speed
machining optimization, where higher cutting speeds,
smoother contours, a better surface finishing and greater
precision are achieved.

SOFT HSSA II MACHINING SYSTEM Option to enable the HSSA-II (High Speed Surface
Accuracy) algorithm for high speed machining (HSC).
This new HSSA algorithm allows for high speed
machining optimization, where higher cutting speeds,
smoother contours, a better surface finishing and greater
precision are achieved. The HSSA-II algorithm has the
following advantages compared to the HSSA-I algorithm.
• Advanced algorithm for point preprocessing in real
time.
• Extended curvature algorithm with dynamic
limitations. Improved acceleration and jerk control.
• Greater number of pre-processed points.
• Filters to smooth out the dynamic machine behavior.

SOFT TANGENTIAL CONTROL Option to enable tangential control. "Tangential Control"


maintains a rotary axis always in the same orientation with
respect to the programmed tool path. The machining path
is defined on the axes of the active plane and the CNC
maintains the orientation of the rotary axis along the entire
tool path.

SOFT PROBE Option to enable functions G100, G103 and G104 (for
probe movements) and probe canned cycles (which help
to measure part surfaces and to calibrate tools). For the
laser model, it only activates the non-cycle function G100.
The CNC may have two probes; usually a tabletop probe
to calibrate tools and a measuring probe to measure the
part.
SOFT FVC STANDARD Options to enable volumetric compensation. The
SOFT FVC UP TO 10m3 precision of the parts is limited by the machine
SOFT FVC MORE TO 10m3 m a n u f a c t u r i n g t o l e r a n c e s , w e a r, t h e e ff e c t o f
temperature, etc., especially on 5-axis machines.
Volumetric compensation corrects these geometric errors
to a larger extent, thus improving the precision of the
positioning. The volume to be compensated is defined by
a point cloud and for each point the
error to be corrected is measured. When mapping the total
work volume of the machine, the CNC knows the exact
position of the tool at all times.
There are 3 options, which depend on the size of the
machine.
• FVC STANDARD: Compensation for 15625 points
(maximum 1000 points per axis). Quick calibration
(time), but less precise than the other two, but
sufficient for the desired tolerances.
• FVC UP TO 10m3: Volume compensation up to 10 m³. CNCelite
More accurate than FVC STANDARD, but requires a 8058 8060
more accurate calibration using a Tracer or Tracker
laser). 8065 8070
• FVC MORE TO 10m3: Volume compensation greater
than 10 m³. More accurate than FVC STANDARD, but
requires a more accurate calibration using a Tracer or REF: 2305
Tracker laser.

ꞏ13ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

Software option Description.

SOFT CONV USER CYCLES Option to enable user conversational cycles. The user and
the OEM can add their own canned cycles (user cycles)
using the FGUIM application that comes installed on the
CNC. The application offers a guided way to define a new
component and its softkey menu without having to be
familiar with script languages. User cycles work in a
similar way as Fagor canned cycles.

SOFT PROGTL3 Option to enable the ProGTL3 programming language


(ISO language extension), allowing profiles to be
programmed using a geometric language and without the
need to use an external CAD system. This language can
program lines and circles where the end point is defined
as the intersection of 2 other sections, pockets, ruled
surfaces, etc.

SOFT PPTRANS Option to enable the program translator, which can


convert programs written in other languages to Fagor ISO
code.

SOFT DMC Option to enable the DMC (Dynamic Machining Control).


DMC adapts the feedrate during machining to maintain
the cutting power as close as possible to ideal machining
conditions.

SOFT FMC Option to enable the FMC (Fagor Machining Calculator).


The FMC application consists of a database of materials
to be machined and machining operations, with an
interface to choose suitable cutting conditions for these
operations.

SOFT FFC Option to enable the FFC (Fagor Feed Control). During
the execution of a canned cycle of the editor, the FFC
function makes it possible to replace the feedrate and
speed programmed in the cycle with the active values of
the execution, which are acted upon by the feed override
and speed override.

SOFT 60/65/70 OPERATING TERMS Option to enable a temporary user license for the CNC,
which is valid until the date set by the OEM. While the
license is valid, the CNC will be fully operational
(according to the purchased software options).
SOFT FCAS Option to enable the FCAS (Fagor Collision Avoidance
System). The FCAS option, within the system limitations,
monitors the automatic, MDI/MDA, manual and tool
inspection movements in real time, so as to avoid
collisions between the tool and the machine. The FCAS
option requires that the HD graphics to be active and that
there is a defined a model configuration of the machine
adjusted to reality (.xca file), which includes all its moving
parts.
SOFT GENERATE ISO CODE ISO generation converts canned cycles, calls to
subroutines, loops, etc. into their equivalent ISO code (G,
F, S, etc functions), so the user can modify it and adapt it
to his needs (eliminate unwanted movements, etc.). The
CNC generates the new ISO code while simulating the
program, either from the DISIMU mode or from the
conversational mode.

SOFT PWM CONTROL Option to enable PWM (Pulse - Width Modulation) control
on laser machines. This feature is essential for cutting
very thick sheets, where the CNC must create a series of
CNCelite PWM pulses to control laser power when drilling the initial
8058 8060 point.
This function is only available for Sercos bus control
8065 8070 systems and must also use one of the two fast digital
outputs available from the central unit.

SOFT GAP CONTROL Option to enable gap control, which makes it possible to
REF: 2305
set a fixed distance between the laser nozzle and the
sheet surface with the use of a sensor. The CNC
compensates the difference between the distance
measured by the sensor and the programmed distance
with additional movements on the axis programmed for
the gap.

ꞏ14ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

Software option Description.

SOFT MANUAL NESTING Option to enable nesting in the automatic option. Nesting
consists of creating a pattern on the sheet material using
previously defined figures (in dxf, dwg or parametric files),
so as to use most of the sheet as possible. Once the
pattern has been defined, the CNC creates a program.
During manual nesting, the operator distributes the parts
on top of the sheet material.

SOFT AUTO NESTING Option to enable nesting in the automatic option. Nesting
consists of creating a pattern on the sheet material using
previously defined figures (in dxf, dwg or parametric files),
so as to use most of the sheet as possible. Once the
pattern has been defined, the CNC creates a program.
During automatic nesting, the application distributes the
figures on the sheet material and optimizes the spaces.

SOFT DRILL CYCL OL Option to enable ISO drilling cycles (G80, G81, G82,
G83).

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ15ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ16ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY,
WARRANTY CONDITIONS AND QUALITY
CERTIFICATES.

EC-DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

The declaration of conformity is available from the downloads section of the


Fagor Automation corporate website.

https://www.fagorautomation.com/en/downloads/

Type of file: Declaration of conformity.

NRTL CERTIFICATE FOR USA AND CANADA

The quality certificates are available from ꞏthe companyꞏ label on the Fagor
Automation corporate website.

https://www.fagorautomation.com/en/sections/quality/

WARRANTY TERMS

The sales and warranty conditions are available from the downloads section of the Fagor Automation
corporate website.

https://www.fagorautomation.com/en/downloads/

Type of file: General sales - warranty conditions.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ17ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ18ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

SAFETY CONDITIONS.

Read the following safety measures in order to prevent harming people or damage to this product and those
products connected to it. Fagor Automation shall not be held responsible of any physical or material damage
originated from not complying with these basic safety rules.

Before start-up, verify that the machine that integrates this CNC meets the 2006/42/EC Directive.

PRECAUTIONS BEFORE CLEANING THE UNIT

Do not get into the inside of the unit. Only personnel authorized by Fagor Automation may access the
interior of this unit.
Do not handle the connectors with the unit Before handling these connectors (I/O, feedback, etc.), make sure
connected to AC power. that the unit is not powered.

PRECAUTIONS DURING REPAIRS

In case of a malfunction or failure, disconnect it and call the technical service.


Do not get into the inside of the unit. Only personnel authorized by Fagor Automation may access the
interior of this unit.
Do not handle the connectors with the unit Before handling these connectors (I/O, feedback, etc.), make sure
connected to AC power. that the unit is not powered.

PRECAUTIONS AGAINST PERSONAL HARM

Interconnection of modules. Use the connection cables provided with the unit.
Use proper cables. To prevent risks, only use cables and Sercos fiber recommended for
this unit.
To prevent a risk of electrical shock at the central unit, use the proper
connector (supplied by Fagor); use a three-prong power cable (one
of them being ground).
Avoid electric shocks. To prevent electrical shock and fire risk, do not apply electrical voltage
out of the indicated range.
Ground connection. In order to avoid electrical discharges, connect the ground terminals
of all the modules to the main ground terminal. Also, before
connecting the inputs and outputs of this product, make sure that the
ground connection has been done.
In order to avoid electrical shock, before turning the unit on verify that
the ground connection is properly made.
CNCelite
Do not work in humid environments. In order to avoid electrical discharges, always work with a relative
8058 8060
humidity (non-condensing). 8065 8070
Do not work in explosive environments. In order to avoid risks, harm or damages, do not work in explosive
environments.
REF: 2305

ꞏ19ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

PRECAUTIONS AGAINST DAMAGE TO THE PRODUCT

Work environment. This unit is ready to be used in industrial environments complying with
the directives and regulations effective in the European Community.
Fagor Automation shall not be held responsible for any damage
suffered or caused by the CNC when installed in other environments
(residential, homes, etc.).
Install this unit in the proper place. It is recommended, whenever possible, to install the CNC away from
coolants, chemical product, blows, etc. that could damage it.
This unit meets the European directives on electromagnetic
compatibility. Nevertheless, it is recommended to keep it away from
sources of electromagnetic disturbance such as:
Powerful loads connected to the same mains as the unit.
Nearby portable transmitters (radio-telephones, Ham radio
transmitters).
Nearby radio / TC transmitters.
Nearby arc welding machines.
Nearby high voltage lines.
Enclosures. It is up to the manufacturer to guarantee that the enclosure where the
unit has been installed meets all the relevant directives of the
European Union.
Avo id d is tu r b a nc es co m in g f r om t h e The machine must have all the interference generating elements
machine. (relay coils, contactors, motors, etc.) uncoupled.
Use the proper power supply. Use an external regulated 24 Vdc power supply for the keyboard,
operator panel and the remote modules.
Connecting the power supply to ground. The zero Volt point of the external power supply must be connected
to the main ground point of the machine.
Analog inputs and outputs connection. Use shielded cables connecting all their meshes to the corresponding
pin.
Ambient conditions. Maintain the CNC within the recommended temperature range, both
when running and not running. See the corresponding chapter in the
hardware manual.
Central unit enclosure. To maintain the right ambient conditions in the enclosure of the central
unit, it must meet the requirements indicated by Fagor. See the
corresponding chapter in the hardware manual.
Power switch. This switch must be easy to access and at a distance between 0.7 and
1.7 m (2.3 and 5.6 ft) off the floor.

SAFETY SYMBOLS

Symbols that may appear in the manual.

Danger or prohibition symbol.


This symbol indicates actions or operations that may hurt people or damage products.

Warning or caution symbol.


This symbol indicates situations that certain operations could cause and the suggested actions to prevent
them.

CNCelite
Obligation symbol.
8058 8060
This symbol indicates actions and operations that must be carried out.
8065 8070
Information symbol.
REF: 2305 i This symbol indicates notes, warnings and advises.

Symbol for additional documentation.


This symbol indicates that there is another document with more detailed and specific information.

ꞏ20ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

Symbols that the product may carry.

Ground symbol.
This symbol indicates that that point must be under voltage.

ESD components.
This symbol identifies the cards as ESD components (sensitive to electrostatic discharges).

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ21ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ22ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

RETURNING CONDITIONS.

Pack it in its original package along with its original packaging material. If you do not have the original
packaging material, pack it as follows:
1 Get a cardboard box whose 3 inside dimensions are at least 15 cm (6 inches) larger than those of the
unit itself. The cardboard being used to make the box must have a resistance of 170 Kg (375 lb.).
2 Attach a label to the device indicating the owner of the device along with contact information (address,
telephone number, email, name of the person to contact, type of device, serial number, etc.). In case
of malfunction also indicate symptom and a brief description of the problem.
3 Protect the unit wrapping it up with a roll of polyethylene or with similar material. When sending a central
unit with monitor, protect especially the screen.
4 Pad the unit inside the cardboard box with polyurethane foam on all sides.
5 Seal the cardboard box with packaging tape or with industrial staples.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ23ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ24ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

CNC MAINTENANCE.

CLEANING

The accumulated dirt inside the unit may act as a screen preventing the proper dissipation of the heat
generated by the internal circuitry which could result in a harmful overheating of the unit and, consequently,
possible malfunctions. Accumulated dirt can sometimes act as an electrical conductor and short-circuit the
internal circuitry, especially under high humidity conditions.

To clean the operator panel and the monitor, a smooth cloth should be used which has been dipped into
de-ionized water and /or non abrasive dish-washer soap (liquid, never powder) or 75º alcohol. Never use
air compressed at high pressure to clean the unit because it could cause the accumulation of electrostatic
charges that could result in electrostatic shocks.

The plastics used on the front panel are resistant to grease and mineral oils, bases and bleach, dissolved
detergents and alcohol. Avoid the action of solvents such as chlorine hydrocarbons, venzole, esters and
ether which can damage the plastics used to make the unit’s front panel.

PRECAUTIONS BEFORE CLEANING THE UNIT

Fagor Automation shall not be held responsible for any material or physical damage derived from the
violation of these basic safety requirements.
• Do not handle the connectors with the unit supplied with power. Before handling these connectors (I/O,
feedback, etc.), make sure that the unit is not powered.
• Do not get into the inside of the unit. Only personnel authorized by Fagor Automation may access the
interior of this unit.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ25ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ26ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

NEW FEATURES.

Manual reference: Ref: 2305


Date of publication: May, 2023
Associated software: v2.22.01

Below is a list of the features added in this software version and the manuals that describe them.
List of features. Manual
RIOR-E-48I32O-FEEDBACK. [RIOS]
THIN CLIENT 15 [PPC]
The simulated axes do not require a validation code.
The CNC recognizes the 220 V Quercus drives.
The CNC recognizes the compact Quercus drives.
New BCSD-OP with increased setpoint resolution (0.0001 rpm).
Third-party HIPERFACE linear sensor.
OPC-UA. Variable (V.)G.CNCMSG with write permission.
Change of units in the MINANOUT and SERVOOFF parameters; they are defined in millivolts [INST]
(previously, internal units).
Exceeds the rated speed of the synchronous motor, increasing the magnetic flux. [INST]
• Machine parameter: MOT_FWEAK_SPEED
Open-loop spindle control via an EtherCAT analog output. [INST]

M2-SATA hard disk diagnostics. [OPT]


• Hard disk monitoring via S.M.A.R.T. data.
• Hard disk durability monitoring. If the hard drive has more than 75% of life, the CNC will
display a warning, and if it has more than 90%, it will display a fatal error that will force the
CNC to shut down.
Allows third parties to encrypt the files. [OPT]
Displays the encrypted OEM subroutine call block. If the OEM subroutine is encrypted (G180 to
G189), the CNC displays the subroutine call block.
The G4 timer waits the entire programmed time. [PRG]
Extends the search paths when calling a global subroutine from an OEM subroutine. [PRG]
Open-loop spindle control via an EtherCAT analog output. [VAR]
• Variable: (V.)A.ANAO[set].xn
(V.)A.ANAO.xn
Updating and bug fixes.
[CYC-M] ............. Ciclos fijos de mecanizado (modelo ꞏMꞏ).
[CYC-T].............. Ciclos fijos de mecanizado (modelo ꞏTꞏ).
[ERR] ................. Solución de errores.
[EXA-T] .............. Manual de ejemplos (modelo ꞏTꞏ).
[HARD]............... Configuración de hardware.
[INST]................. Installation manual.
[OPT] ................. Manual de operación.
[PPC] ................. Panel PC.
[PRB-M] ............. Trabajo con palpador (modelo ꞏMꞏ).
[PRB-T] .............. Trabajo con palpador (modelo ꞏTꞏ).
[PRG] ................. Manual de programación.
[RIOS] ................ Módulos remotos (RIO5, RIOW, RIOR, RIOR-E).
[RIOS-A] ............ Módulo "ABSIND".
[VAR].................. CNC variables.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ27ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ28ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

1 PREVIOUS INFORMATION.

About this manual.


This manual describes the characteristics, technical data and connections of the hardware
associated with the CNC. The installation manual describes the CNC configuration, machine
adaptation and start-up.

Installation and startup. 1.

PREVIOUS INFORMATION.
The hardware described in this manual is ready to be used in industrial environments
complying with the directives and regulations effective in the European Community. Before
start-up, verify that the machine that integrates this CNC meets the 89/392/CEE directive.

Qualification of personnel.
The unit can only be repaired by personnel authorized by Fagor Automation.

Only specialized technicians that know and understand the contents of this manual and all
the documentation related to the units may handle any of these units.

They must be trained on safety so they can identify and prevent any danger. Based on their
technical training, knowledge and experience, they must be able to foresee and recognize
any possible danger that may be caused by using these units, changing their settings and
in general by the mechanical, electrical and electronic devices that make up the whole
system.

They must also know the current regulations and standards for preventing accidents that
must be borne in mind when handling these units.

Fagor Automation shall not be held responsible of any physical or material damage
originated from not complying with these basic safety rules.

Safety conditions.

Do not handle the connectors with the unit connected to AC power. Before doing it, make sure that
the unit is unplugged from the power outlet.

Do not get into the inside of the unit. This unit MUST NOT be opened by unauthorized personnel. Only
personnel authorized by Fagor Automation may manipulate the inside of this unit.

In order to avoid personal injuries and damage to this product or to those connected to it,
read carefully the section on safety conditions in the introduction to this manual. Fagor
Automation shall not be held responsible of any physical damage or defective unit resulting
from not complying with these basic safety regulations.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ29ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

1.
PREVIOUS INFORMATION.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ30ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

2 CONFIGURATION.

2.1 Central unit.

Identification. Description.

• In-cabinet Central Unit.

2.
• Possibility of VESA mounting.
• Connecting to a DVI-D monitor.
• Connecting to keyboards and operator
panels via the CAN.

CONFIGURATION.
Central unit.
• Connecting to keyboards via the USB.

2.2 Central unit + Monitor.

The central unit is located on the rear of the monitor.

Identification. Description.

• The central unit is located on the rear of the


monitor.
• 15" (1024 × 768 pixels) monitor, aspect ratio
4:3, 24-bit color.
• USB 2.0 port, at the front, protected by a
cover.

MONITOR-LCD-15

• The central unit is located on the rear of the


monitor.
• 15" (1024 × 768 pixels) monitor, aspect ratio
4:3, 24-bit color.
• USB 2.0 port, at the front, protected by a
cover.
• Capacitive multi-touch screen, optimized for
the machine tool sector, including work using
gloves typically found in the sector.
CNCelite
8058 8060
MONITOR-LCD-15AT MULTITOUCH 8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ31ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

2.3 Central unit + Monitor + Keyboard.

The central unit is located on the rear of the monitor.

Identification. Description.

• Central unit.
• 10.4" LCD monitor (800x600) 18-bit color.
• Built-in keyboard.

2. • USB 2.0 port, at the front, protected by a


cover.
• Touch-screen optional.
CONFIGURATION.
Central unit + Monitor + Keyboard.

MONITOR-LCD-10 HORIZONTAL
MONITOR-LCD-10 TOUCH HORIZONTAL

• Central unit.
• 10.4" LCD monitor (800x600) 18-bit color.
• Built-in keyboard.
• USB 2.0 port, at the front, protected by a
cover.
• Touch-screen optional.

MONITOR-LCD-10 VERTICAL
MONITOR-LCD-10 TOUCH VERTICAL

2.4 Central unit + Monitor + Keyboard and Operator panel.

The central unit is located on the rear of the monitor.

Identification. Description.

• Central unit.
• 10.4" LCD monitor (800x600) 18-bit color.
• Built-in keyboard.
• Built-in operator panel.
• USB 2.0 port, at the front, protected by a
cover.

MONITOR-LCD-10K

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ32ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

2.5 Monitor.

Identification. Description.

• Type: TFT LED LCD FullHD.


• Screen: 10-point multi-touch capacitive.
• Size: 21.5" (aspect ratio 16:9).
• Screen color: 24 bits (16.7 million colors).

2.
• Resolution: 1920 × 1080.

Monitor.
CONFIGURATION.
MONITOR-21W MULTITOUCH
MONITOR-21W MULTITOUCH NEUTRO

• Type: TFT LED LCD WXGA.


• Screen: 10-point multi-touch capacitive.
• Size: 18" (aspect ratio 16:9).
• Screen color: 24 bits (16.7 million colors).
• Resolution: 1366 × 768.

MONITOR-18W MULTITOUCH

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ33ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

2.6 Operator panels.

Identification. Description.

• Length 329 mm (12.95").


• 12 configurable user keys.
• Jog switch (0 - 200 %).
• 15 configurable jog keys.

2.
• CNC power-down key.
• CAN communication (CANopen protocol).
• Spindle override key.
• Possibility to connect up to three
CONFIGURATION.
Operator panels.

handwheels.
OP-PANEL-329

• Length 420 mm (16.54")


• 16 configurable user keys.
• Jog switch (0 - 200 %).
• 15 configurable jog keys.
• CNC power-down key.
• CAN communication (CANopen protocol).
• Spindle override key.
OP-PANEL • Possibility to connect up to three
OP-PANEL-A handwheels.

• Length 420 mm (16.54")


• 16 configurable user keys.
• Jog switch (0 - 200 %).
• 15 configurable jog keys.
• CNC power-down key.
• CAN communication (CANopen protocol).
• Spindle override switch.
OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE • Possibility to connect up to three
OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE-A handwheels.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ34ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

2.7 CAN keyboard.

Identification. Description.

• CAN horizontal, alphanumeric QWERTY


keyboard.

2.
HORIZONTAL KEYB

CONFIGURATION.
CAN keyboard.
• CAN vertical, alphanumeric keyboard.

VERTICAL KEYB

2.8 USB keyboard.

Identification. Description.

• USB horizontal, alphanumeric QWERTY


keyboard.
• Multi-touch touchpad (touch panel).
• Numeric keypad optimized to operate with
the CNC (keys for axes, feedrate, speed, etc).
• Special functions with the Fagor key.

HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0 + TOUCHPAD.


HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0-A.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ35ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

2.9 CAN remote modules.

Remote modules may be used to have extra resources (see table below) distributed at
different locations of the machine or installed in the electrical cabinet.

Identification. Description.

• CAN communication (CANopen protocol).


• Digital inputs and outputs.
• Analog inputs and outputs.

2. • Analog inputs for PT100 temperature


sensors.
CONFIGURATION.
CAN remote modules.

RIO5 series
• CAN communication (CANopen protocol).
• Digital inputs and outputs.
• Analog inputs and outputs.
• Analog inputs for PT100 temperature
sensors.

RIOW series

• CAN communication (CANopen protocol).


• Digital inputs and outputs.
• Analog inputs and outputs.
• Analog inputs for PT100 temperature
sensors.

RIOR series

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ36ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

2.10 EtherCAT remote modules.

Remote modules may be used to have extra resources (see table below) distributed at
different locations of the machine or installed in the electrical cabinet.

Identification. Description.

• EtherCAT communication.
• Digital inputs and outputs.
• Analog inputs and outputs.
• Analog inputs for PT100
sensors.
temperature
2.

CONFIGURATION.
EtherCAT remote modules.
RIOW-E series

• EtherCAT communication.
• Digital inputs and outputs.
• Analog inputs and outputs (configurable to
voltage or current).
• Analog inputs for PT100 temperature
sensors.

RIOR-E series

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ37ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

2.11 General diagram (8058 integrated model).

See the schematic description of all the elements that make up the CNC system.

CNC

2.
CONFIGURATION.
General diagram (8058 integrated model).

MONITOR-LCD-10K-001

Sercos III EtherCAT CAN

Servo drive system. Remote modules. Remote modules.

RIOR

RIOW-E RIO5

RIOW
RIOR-E
DRIVES

EtherCAT Drive System.

BCSD

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ38ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

2.12 General diagram (8060, 8065 and 8070 integrated models).

See the schematic description of all the elements that make up the CNC system.

CNC

MONITOR-LCD-10 VERTICAL
MONITOR-LCD-10 TOUCH VERTICAL

2.

CONFIGURATION.
General diagram (8060, 8065 and 8070 integrated models).
MONITOR-LCD-10K-001 MONITOR-LCD-10 HORIZONTAL
MONITOR-LCD-10 TOUCH HORIZONTAL

CAN

Operator panel.

MONITOR-LCD-15 MONITOR-LCD-15AT-MULTITOUCH

USB EtherCAT
OP-PANEL-329

Keyboard. Remote modules.

OP-PANEL
OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE
HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0
RIOW-E
+ TOUCHPAD.
Keyboard.
CAN
RIOR-E
VERTICAL KEYB
Sercos III

HORIZONTAL KEYB
EtherCAT Drive System.

Servo drive system.

Remote modules.

RIOR
CNCelite
BCSD
8058 8060
DRIVES 8065 8070
RIO5

RIOW REF: 2305

ꞏ39ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

2.13 General diagram (in-cabinet model).

See the schematic description of all the elements that make up the CNC system.

MONITOR

2.
CONFIGURATION.
General diagram (in-cabinet model).

MONITOR-18W MULTITOUCH MONITOR-21W MULTITOUCH


MONITOR-21W MULTITOUCH NEUTRO

DVI-D

Central unit.

CAN
Operator panel.

EtherCAT

Remote modules. OP-PANEL-329

RIOW-E OP-PANEL
OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE
RIOR-E
USB

Keyboard.
CAN

Keyboard.
EtherCAT Drive System.

HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0


+ TOUCHPAD.

Sercos III BCSD Remote modules.


Servo drive system. RIOR
CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070
RIO5

REF: 2305 RIOW

DRIVES

ꞏ40ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

3 CENTRAL UNIT (CPU) ENCLOSURE.

The enclosure must be designed to ensure an ambient temperature of 45 ºC (113 ºF) and
while the unit is running, the inside temperature of the CNC must not exceed 60 ºC (140 ºF).
The inside temperature of the CNC may be monitored from the diagnosis mode (see the
operating manual).

Enclosure requirements.
The enclosure must meet the following requirements. 3.
• The protection degree of the enclosure must be IP54.

CENTRAL UNIT (CPU) ENCLOSURE.


• The dissipation surface of the enclosure must be enough to evacuate (by convection)
the heat generated inside. Dissipation surfaces are all the surfaces of the enclosure
except the front and bottom.
• The enclosure must respect the minimum distances recommended between the
enclosure walls and the central unit to let the air flow and improve heat dissipation.

To meet the previous requirements, Fagor recommends the following.


i • The enclosure must not have any ventilation holes, because they could let dust or other substances
in.
• To improve heat dissipation, install a fan inside the enclosure for air circulation.

Before building an enclosure with glass fiber u another poor heat dissipating material, contact Fagor
i Automation.

Minimum enclosure dimensions.


If necessary, increase the dimensions of the enclosure; NEVER use smaller dimensions than
the recommended minimum values.
QC-C60-10V QC-C65-10V QC-C70-10V

F Required minimum dimensions:

D
A 394 mm 15.51 inch
E
B 423 mm 16.65 inch
C 125 mm 4.92 inch

D* 15 mm 0.59 inch

D E* 15 mm 0.59 inch
F* 50 mm 1.97 inch
B
(*) The minimum gap between the CNC
and the side walls of the enclosure.

Dissipating surface:
A
0.32 m² 3.44 ft²
C

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ41ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

QC-C60-10H QC-C65-10H QC-C70-10H

E
Required minimum dimensions:

D
A 502 mm 19.76 inch
E B 305 mm 12.00 inch

3. D
C

D*
125 mm

15 mm
4.92 inch

0.59 inch
CENTRAL UNIT (CPU) ENCLOSURE.

E* 15 mm 0.59 inch
B
(*) The minimum gap between the CNC
and the side walls of the enclosure.

A Dissipating surface:

C
0.29 m² 3,12 ft²

QC-C58-10K QC-C60-10K QC-C65-10K QC-C70-10K


QC-C60-15 QC-C65-15 QC-C70-15
QC-C60-15AT QC-C65-15AT QC-C70-15AT

E
Required minimum dimensions:

D
A 450 mm 17,72 inch
E B 380 mm 14,96 inch

C 135 mm 5.31 inch


D
D* 15 mm 0.59 inch

E* 15 mm 0.59 inch
B
(*) The minimum gap between the CNC
and the side walls of the enclosure.

A Dissipating surface:

C 0.33 m² 3.55 ft²

Power dissipated by the CNC.


To calculate the dissipated power, all the elements that are inside the enclosure must be
taken into account. The central unit dissipates 24 W.

CNCelite Characteristics of the inside fan of the enclosure.


8058 8060
• Type of fan; ball bearings.
8065 8070
• Work temperature, between -10 ºC (14 ºF) and +60 ºC (140 ºF).
• Air flow greater than 13.6 m³/h
REF: 2305
• Life expectancy L10 >= 100.000 hours (taken at 25 ºC (77 ºF))

ꞏ42ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

3.1 Calculation of the surface needed for heat dissipation.

To calculate the total surface required for the enclosure, in order to dissipate the heat
generated in it, the following data must be considered.

Ta A

Ts

3.
P
A=
Cf ꞏ (Ts-Ta)
P

CENTRAL UNIT (CPU) ENCLOSURE.


Calculation of the surface needed for heat dissipation.
Data Units Meaning

TO (m²) Total required surface (The entire surface of the enclosure except the
bottom one is considered useful).

P (W) Total power dissipated by all the elements that generate heat inside the
enclosure, including the power supply and the fan, if there is one.

Ta (ºC) Ambient temperature (outside the enclosure).

Ts (ºC) Internal CNC temperature.

Cf (m²) Dissipation coefficient of the material used for the enclosure.

Heat dissipation example for an enclosure with the


recommended minimum surface.
The dissipation coefficient corresponds to an enclosure made of painted sheet metal.

Heat dissipation by natural convection. Heat dissipation by forced convection with


internal fan (flow Q = 13.6 m³/h).

Ta Ta
A A
P P
A = -----------------------------
- A = -----------------------------
-
Ts
4,2   Ts – Ta  Ts 6,2   Ts – Ta 
P P

10H monitor. 10V monitor. 10K monitor.


15 monitor.
15AT monitor.

Ambient (room) temperature 45 ºC (113 ºF) 45 ºC (113 ºF) 45 ºC (113 ºF)


(Ta).
Dissipated power. 24 W 24 W 24 W

Dissipating surface. 029 m² (3.12 ft²) 0.32 m² (3.34 ft²) 0.33 m² (3.,55 ft²)

Fan. Yes No Yes No Yes No


Air flow of the fan. 13.6 --- 13.6 --- 13.6 ---
m³/h m³/h m³/h
CNCelite
Dissipation coefficient. 6.2 4.2 6.2 4.2 6.2 4.2
8058 8060
Internal CNC temperature. 58.3 ºC 64.6 ºC 57 ºC 62.8 ºC 56.5 ºC 62.1 ºC
8065 8070
136.9 ºF 148.3 ºF 134.6 ºF 145 ºF 133.7 ºF 143.8 ºF

REF: 2305

In this case, for an inside temperature of 45 ºC (113 ºF), the enclosure must be larger or an
inside fan must be installed to improve heat dissipation by making the air flow inside.

ꞏ43ꞏ
3.

ꞏ44ꞏ
CENTRAL UNIT (CPU) ENCLOSURE.

REF: 2305
CNCelite
Calculation of the surface needed for heat dissipation.

8065 8070
8058 8060
Hardware configuration.
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

4 CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).

Do not get into the inside of the unit. This unit MUST NOT be opened by unauthorized personnel. Only
personnel authorized by Fagor Automation may access the interior of this unit.

All models have a USB 2.0 port at the front, protected with a cover.

Model. Differences.

4.
QC-C##-10K • Compact CNC; monitor, central unit, keyboard and operator panel.
• 10.4" (800 × 600 pixels) monitor, aspect ratio 4:3, 18-bit color.

QC-C##-10H • Compact CNC; monitor, central unit and keyboard.

CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).


QC-C##-10HT • 10.4" (800 × 600 pixels) monitor, aspect ratio 4:3, 18-bit color.
QC-C##-10V • Touch screen (only QC-C##-10HT / QC-C##-10VT).
QC-C##-10VT • Connection for a CAN operator panel.

QC-C##-15 • Modular CNC; monitor and central unit.


• 15" (1024 × 768 pixels) monitor, aspect ratio 4:3, 24-bit color.
• Connection for a USB or CAN keyboard.
• Connection for a CAN operator panel.

QC-C##-15AT • Modular CNC; monitor and central unit.


• 15" (1024 × 768 pixels) monitor, aspect ratio 4:3, 24-bit color.
• Capacitive multi-touch screen, optimized for the machine tool sector,
including work with gloves typically found in the sector.
• Connection for a USB or CAN keyboard.
• Connection for a CAN operator panel.

QC-C70-10K
QC-C65-10K
QC-C60-10K
QC-C58-10K

QC-C70-10H
QC-C70-10HT
QC-C65-10H
QC-C65-10HT
QC-C60-10H
QC-C60-10HT

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ45ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

QC-C70-10V
QC-C70-10VT
QC-C65-10V
QC-C65-10VT
QC-C60-10V
QC-C60-10VT

4.
CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).

QC-C70-15
QC-C65-15
QC-C60-15

QC-C70-15AT
QC-C65-15AT
QC-C60-15AT

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ46ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

4.1 Specifications.

The machine manufacturer must comply with the EN 60204-1 (IEC-204-1) regulation
regarding electrical shocks in case of defective input/output pins with external power supply
when not plugging the connector before turning the power supply on.

Specifications. Description.

General. • Central unit with monitor, keyboard (depending on the model) and
operator panel (depending on the model).
• Dimensions (width × height × depth).
QC-C##-10K
- 420 × 350 × 68 mm. - 16.54" × 13.78" × 2.68".
4.
QC-C##-10H / QC-C##-10HT

CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).


Specifications.
- 472 × 275 × 58.5 mm. - 18.58" × 10.83" × 2.30".
QC-C##-10V / QC-C##-10VT.
- 329 × 393 × 58.5 mm. - 12.95" × 15.47" × 2.30".
QC-C##-15
- 420 × 350 × 68 mm. - 16.54" × 13.78" × 2.68".
QC-C##-15AT
- 420 × 350 × 63 mm. - 16.54" × 13.78" × 2.48".

Operating conditions. • Equipment for indoor use in non-hazardous locations, operated by


qualified personnel skilled in its use.
• The equipment must be installed in an enclosure that meets the
requirements described in this manual.
• Equipment designed for use in fixed locations.
• Equipment not suitable for wet areas.
• Never use in explosive environments (dangerous areas).

System. • Processor (depending on the model):


- CP-IC-E352-2-2.
- CP-IC-E354-4-4.
- CP-IM-BT52-2-2.
• RAM.
- 4 GB.
• Storage (depending on the model):
(SO, CNC and user programs).
- Internal 15 GB (only 8058).
- Internal 16/20 GB (only 8060).
- Internal 16/20/40 GB (only 8065 and 8070).
• Storage expansion (optional):
(user programs).
- CFast 32 GB.
- CFast 128 GB.
• Without fan.
• Without battery.
• SO:
- Windows 10 (32 bits multi-touch).

LCD. • QC-C##-10K / QC-C##-10H / QC-C##-10V.


- TFT 18-bit color LCD.
- 10.4" (ratio 4:3) 800 × 600 pixels
- Non-touch screen.
• QC-C##-10HT / QC-C##-10VT.
- TFT 18-bit color LCD.
- 10.4" (ratio 4:3) 800 × 600 pixels
- Touch screen.
• QC-C##-15.
- TFT 24-bit color LCD. CNCelite
- 15" (ratio 4:3) 1024 × 768 pixels 8058 8060
- Non-touch screen.
• QC-C##-15AT. 8065 8070
- TFT 24-bit color LCD.
- 15" (ratio 4:3) 1024 × 768 pixels
- Capacitive multi-touch screen. REF: 2305

ꞏ47ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

Specifications. Description.

Regulations. • It complies with the European directives for electromagnetic


compatibility 2014/30/EU and low voltage 2014/35/EU. See the
declaration of conformity, available on our website.
• UL 61010-1 (Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use - Part 1: General
Requirements). See the certificate, available on our website.
• IEC/UL 61010-2-201 (Safety requirements for elecrical equipement for
measurement, control and laboratory use. Particular requirements for

4.
control equipment).
• Canadian Standards Associations: CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process
Control Equipement).

Packaging. • The package meets the regulation EN 60068-2-32 procedure 1 with a


CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).
Specifications.

random fall from a height not greater than 1 m.

Ambient. • Storage and transport temperature according to IEC 61131-2:


- Between -40 ºC (-40 ºF) and +70 ºC (158 ºF).
• Work temperature according to IEC 61131-2:
- Between 5 ºC (41 ºF) and 55 ºC (131 ºF).
• Temperature outside cabinet according to IEC 61131-2:
- Between 5 ºC (41 ºF) and 45 ºC (113 ºF).
• Temperature inside the enclosure:
- Less than 55 ºC (131 ºF).
• Relative humidity according to IEC 61131-2:
- 20 ~ 85% RH without condensation.
• Maximum work altitude:
- The unit must work properly at 2000 m according to IEC 61131-2.
• Vibration test according to IEC 60068-2-6 with a frequency step of
1 octave/minute (±10%) and a duration of 10 sweeps.
- 5 Hz  f  8.4 Hz; movement of constant 3.5 mm amplitude (peak
value).
- 8.4 Hz  f  150 Hz; 1g acceleration and constant amplitude (peak
value).
• Degree of protection according to EN 60529:
- IP65 (front), IP20 (rear).
• Pollution degree 2 according to IEC/UL 61010-1.
Electrical. • Connection to mains supply: Permanent.
• Operating conditions: Continuous.
• Protection against electric shock: Class III (PE connection is only for
functional earthing).
• OVC I protection level according to IEC/UL 61010-1.

Power supply. • Use a regulated 24 V DC power supply (between -15% and +20%) and
2 A (including voltage ripple and noise). The power supply must meet
the UL1950 standard.

Connectivity. • 1 USB 2.0 port on the front, protected by a cover.


• 1 USB 2.0 port on the rear (only QC-C58 / QC-C60).
• 2 USB 2.0 ports on the rear (only QC-C65 / QC-C70).
• 1 USB 3.0 port on the rear (only QC-C65 / QC-C70).
• 1 Ethernet port for 10/100/1000 BaseT connection.
• CAN Bus (CANopen).
• Sercos III bus.
• EtherCAT bus.

Inputs/outputs. • 16 opto-coupled digital inputs (24 V DC).


- IEC61131-2 type 1 and type 3 compliant.
• 8 opto-coupled digital outputs (24 V DC, 500 mA).
CNCelite - ON cycle: minimum 75 µs (25 µs, optional in two of them).
• 1 analog outputs (±10 V, 16-bit resolution).
8058 8060 • 1 feedback inputs (5 V, 250 mA).
8065 8070 - Incremental TTL signal, differential TTL or 1 Vpp.
- SSI, EnDat or full digital BiSS communication protocols.
- Frequency : 100 kHz (TTL), 1000 kHz (TTL differential) / 500 kHz (1
REF: 2305 Vpp).
• 1 relay with one normally open contact (1A at 24V).
• 2 probe inputs (5 V or 24 V)
• 1 entry for UPS.
• 1 input for three handwheels with A and B signals (5 V DC TTL)
(only QC-C##-10K).

ꞏ48ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

4.1.1 Conditions of acceptabity for NRTL certification.

• This equipment is for indoor use in non-hazardous locations, operated by qualified


personnel skilled in its use.
• The equipement shall be supplied with the specified rated voltages according to the
hardware manual.
• The nature of the installation where it is connected must not exceed OVC II.
• The equipment fullfils the requirements of the tested standars only if it is operated

4.
according to the hardware manual.
• The end application has to fulfill the requirements for resistance to mechanical stresses.
• To meet IP 54, the system must be installed in an appropiate enclosure according to the

CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).


Specifications.
hardware manual.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ49ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

4.2 Dimensions. CNC8058.

c a

4.
Db b
CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).
Dimensions. CNC8058.

Da

mm inch mm inch
a 420 16.54 Da 373 14.68

b 350 13.78 Db 306 12.04

c 56 2.20

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ50ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

4.3 Dimensions. CNC 8060/8065/8070.

4.3.1 QC-C##-10K.

c a

4.

CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).


Dimensions. CNC 8060/8065/8070.
Db b

Da

mm inch mm inch

a 420 16.54 Da 388 15.28


b 350 13.78 Db 318 12.52

c 68 2.68

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ51ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

4.3.2 QC-C##-10H / QC-C##-10HT.

c a

4. Db b
CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).
Dimensions. CNC 8060/8065/8070.

Da

mm inch mm inch

a 472 18.58 Da 440 17.32

b 275 10.83 Db 243 9.57

c 58,5 2.30

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ52ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

4.3.3 QC-C##-10V / QC-C##-10VT.

c a

4.

CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).


Dimensions. CNC 8060/8065/8070.
Db b

Da

mm inch mm inch
a 329 12.95 Da 296 11.65

b 393 15.47 Db 361 14.21

c 58,5 2.30

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ53ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

4.3.4 QC-C##-15.

c a

4. Db b
CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).
Dimensions. CNC 8060/8065/8070.

Da

mm inch mm inch
a 420 16.54 Da 389 15.31

b 350 13.78 Db 319 12.56

c 68 2.68

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ54ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

4.3.5 QC-C##-15AT.

c a

Db b
4.

CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).


Dimensions. CNC 8060/8065/8070.
Da

mm inch mm inch
a 420 16.54 Da 391 15.40

b 350 13.78 Db 321 12.63

c 63 2.48

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ55ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

4.4 Enclosure and securing of the modules.

4.4.1 Ambient characteristics of the enclosure.

The enclosure must be designed to ensure an ambient temperature of 45 ºC (113 ºF) and
while the unit is running, the inside temperature of the CNC must not exceed 60 ºC (140 ºF).
The inside temperature of the CNC may be monitored from the diagnosis mode (see the
operating manual).

4. 4.4.2 Enclosure design.


CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).
Enclosure and securing of the modules.

Before building an enclosure with glass fiber u another poor heat dissipating material, contact Fagor
i Automation.

The enclosure must meet the following requirements:


• Protection degree: IP 54 minimun (according to EN 60529).
• Protection degree: IK 08 minimun (according to IEC 62262).
• Enclosures complying with UL 50 and/or UL 50E and CSA C22.2 Nos. 94.1 or 94.3 for
the intended application, need not be subjected to the applicable requirements in this
standard. Non-metallic materials of enclosures complying with the above standards,
relied upon for containment of fire within the equipment, shall have a minimun
flammability rating of V-1.
• The enclosure must have enough surface area to evacuate by convection the heat
generated inside.
• The enclosure must respect the minimum distances recommended between the
enclosure walls and the central unit to let the air flow and improve heat dissipation.
• In the connector area, reserve a space that allows the cables to be connected, respecting
their radius of curvature.
• Keep the enclosure clean.

Dimensions of the cut off part and the enclosure.


CNC 8058.

d
e

=
W

H
R =

= =
A

CNCelite General tolerance for W and H = ±1 mm (0.04 inches).


Tolerance for d = ±0.2 mm (0.0079 inches).
8058 8060 Maximum radius of the corners = 5 mm (0.2 inches).
8065 8070
mm inch mm inch

REF: 2305 W 380 15.00 e 1.5 - 4 0.06 - 0.16

H 310 12.20 d Ø6 Ø 0.23

A 400 15.75

B 330 13.00

ꞏ56ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

Dimensions of the cut off part and the enclosure.


CNC 8060/8065/8070.

QC-C##-10K.

4.
W

CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).


Enclosure and securing of the modules.
H

mm inch mm inch

W 391 15.40 e 1.5 - 4 0.06 - 0.16

H 321 12.63

QC-C##-10H / QC-C##-10HT.

W
H

mm inch mm inch

W 442 17.40 e 1.5 - 4 0.06 - 0.16

H 245 9.65

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ57ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

QC-C##-10V / QC-C##-10VT.

4. W
CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).
Enclosure and securing of the modules.

mm inch mm inch

W 299 11.77 e 1.5 - 4 0.06 - 0.16

H 363 14.29

QC-C##-15.

mm inch mm inch

W 392 15.43 e 1.5 ~ 4.0 0.06 ~ 0.16

H 322 12.67

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ58ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

QC-C##-15AT.

Even though the size of the cut-out for the QC-C##-15AT model is physically compatible with the
i QC-C##-15 model, its size has been increased to facilitate assembly.

4.
W

CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).


Enclosure and securing of the modules.
H

mm inch mm inch

W 393 15.47 e 1.5 ~ 4.0 0.06 ~ 0.16

H 323 12.71

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ59ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

4.4.3 Securing the module.

The module must be installed in a proper enclosure that may be located on the machine or
on an external support. To insert the unit into the enclosure, it must have a big enough hole
to allow to insert it easily, without obstacles and without forcing the unit.

CNC 8058.

4. Secure the module from the inside of the enclosure with 8 M5 nuts, with a tightening torque
of 2.1 Nm.
CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).
Enclosure and securing of the modules.

CNC 8060/8065/8070.
The module is secured from the inside of the enclosure; therefore, there is no need to drill
any holes on the front. Once the unit has been inserted into the enclosure, secure it from
the inside with the tension jacks. To properly secure it, use all the tension jacks. Apply a
tightening torque of 0.7 Nm.

1 2 3
CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305
0.7 Nm

ꞏ60ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

4.5 Power supply for the module.

Do not connect the module to a power supply that is turned on. Before connecting the module, turn
off the power supply off by unplugging the power cable.

4.
Over-voltage

CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).


Power supply for the module.
protection fuse.

Power supply.

4.5.1 Protection against over-voltage and reverse voltage.

The central unit has a F2A fuse that may be accessed from the outside to protect against
over-voltage (greater than 36 V DC or 25 V AC). The central unit is also protected against
reverse connection of the power supply.

4.5.2 Voltage supply at 24 V DC.

• Universal DC power supply. Use a regulated 24 V DC power supply (between -15% and
+20%) and 2 A (including voltage ripple and noise). See "4.5.5 Power supply
requirements." on page 62.
• The unit must be powered with class DVC A power supply with a SELV/PELV protection
output voltage.
• For all connections and terminals of electronic modules, use only power supplies that
provide SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) or PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage) output
voltages.

4.5.3 Power supply via UPS.

See "15 CNC-FPS." on page 285.


CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070
4.5.4 Ground connection.

See "4.9.1 Ground connection." on page 79. REF: 2305

ꞏ61ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

4.5.5 Power supply requirements.

Power the central unit with an external regulated 24V power supply with the following
characteristics. The power supply must meet the UL1950 standard.
• Output voltage.
24 V DC (between -15% and +20%) and 2 A (including voltage ripple and noise).
• Output current.
The continuous load current must be greater than the current consumed by the CNC (2 A)

4. (at the maximum temperature inside the electrical cabinet - enclosure - where the power
supply is).
• Load fluctuations (including the current peak due to the load).
CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).
Power supply for the module.

The output voltage must not exceed the previous limits (20.4 V ÷ 28.8 V), due to load
fluctuations.
• Output voltage holding time after an instantaneous power interruption.
10 ms (for an interruption of 100%) / 20 ms (for an interruption of 50%).

Instantaneous interruption.
(100 %) (50 %)

Input AC voltage

28.8 V
Output voltage

20.4 V

Output current
Sudden load
0A
change

Noise.

Voltage ripple.

Noise.

Example of voltage ripple and noise due to the switching power supply.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ62ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

4.5.6 Connection of the power supply to the line voltage.

The power supply used to power the touch screen elements (CNC, Panel PC and monitor) must always
be connected to the line voltage before the mains filter. This connection provides a "clean" power
supply, avoiding noise and conducted disturbances from the drive.

4.

CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).


Power supply for the module.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ63ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

4.5.7 NOT recommended circuits.

The following types of circuits should NOT be used.


1 Examples of circuits that cannot maintain the output voltage in an instantaneous
interruption (the output voltage drops under 20.4 V).

Example 1. Not recommended diagram.

4. AC input
Rectifier circuit
CNC
CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).
Power supply for the module.

A rectifier circuit is a circuit that uses diodes for full wave rectification.

Example 2. Not recommended diagram.

Rectifier circuit +
AC input CNC

A rectifier circuit is a circuit that uses diodes for full wave rectification.

2 Examples of circuits that exceed the output voltage range (20.4 V to 28.8 V) due to load
fluctuations. For these circuits, use a regulated second phase to power devices with
large load fluctuations so as not to affect the CNC and other units.

Example 1. Not recommended diagram.

Regulated
AC input power supply CNC

Device with large load


fluctuations.

Example 2. Not recommended diagram.

Regulated
AC input power supply CNC

CNCelite Device with high peak


8058 8060 currents due to load
(rush current).
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ64ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

4.6 Non-volatile RAM (FRAM).

The CNC has non-volatile RAM (FRAM) that keeps the information saved in it even when
a power failure occurs. The non-volatile RAM (FRAM) always saves the position of the axes,
the rest of the data that it saves is determined by machine parameters, like for example, PLC
registers (parameter BKUPREG), common arithmetic parameters (parameter BKUPCUP),
etc.

4.7 Hardware functionality (connectors).


4.

CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).


Non-volatile RAM (FRAM).
4.7.1 Front of the monitor.

USB 2.0

USB 2.0 port accessible from the front and protected by a cover, for the connection of a
pendrive, mouse or keyboard. The cover must be tightly closed for the keyboard to comply
with standard IP65.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ65ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

4.7.2 Rear.

CNC 8058.

4.
CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).
Hardware functionality (connectors).

A22
F2A
I65
H62
I23
H30A
I24
H31B
X27
B10 B28 E21

B64 I26 I25

E36

CNC 8060/8065/8070.

A22 F2A
I65
H62
H30C I23
H30A H30B
I24
H31B
X27
B10 B64

I25
B28 E21 I26
CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070 E36

REF: 2305

ꞏ66ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

Connectors list.

Connector.

ꞏA22ꞏ 24 V supply input. See Page 68.

ꞏB10ꞏ Sercos III bus. See Page 68.

ꞏB28ꞏ CAN bus. See Page 68.

ꞏB64ꞏ EtherCAT bus. See Page 69.

4.
ꞏE21ꞏ Local feedback input. See Page 69.

ꞏE36ꞏ Handwheel input (only QC-C##-10K model). See Page 70.

ꞏF2Aꞏ Protection fuse. See Page 70.

CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).


Hardware functionality (connectors).
ꞏH30Aꞏ USB-A 2.0 Port. See Page 70.

ꞏH30Bꞏ USB-A 2.0 Port (only QC-C65 / QC-C70). See Page 70.

ꞏH30Cꞏ USB-A 3.0 Port (only QC-C65 / QC-C70). See Page 71.

ꞏH31Bꞏ Ethernet. See Page 71.

ꞏH62ꞏ CFast See Page 71.

ꞏI23ꞏ Local digital inputs. See Page 72.

ꞏI24ꞏ Local digital outputs. See Page 73.

ꞏI25ꞏ Probe input. See Page 74.

ꞏI26ꞏ General purpose ±10 V analog output (16 bits). See Page 74.

ꞏI65ꞏ UPS control. See Page 75.


ꞏX27ꞏ Relay for the emergency chain. See Page 75.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ67ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

ꞏA22ꞏ 24 V DC supply input.


Plug-in part. 3-pole Phoenix-contact combicon connector (5.08 mm
pitch).

Pin Signal. Function.


1 - - -.

2 GND 0 V reference signal.


3 +24 Vdc Power supply.

4.
Connector data.
Number of poles. 3.
Pitch. 5,08 mm.
Connection technique. Spring connection.
CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).
Hardware functionality (connectors).

Minimum/maximum section. 0.2 / 2.5 mm².


Minimum/maximum AWG section. 24 / 12.
Rated current In. 12 A.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped. 10 mm.

See "4.5 Power supply for the module." on page 61.

ꞏB10ꞏ Sercos III.


RJ45 connector for 4-wire cable.

Pin. Signal.
1 TD +
2 TD -
3 RD +
4 ---
5 ---
6 RD -
7 ---
8 ---

See "4.9.10 Sercos III bus." on page 94.

ꞏB28ꞏ CAN bus.


Plug-in part. 5-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm
pitch).

Pin. Signal. Function.


1 GND Ground / 0 V.
2 CL (LOW) bus signal.
3 SH CAN shield.
4 CH (HIGH) bus signal.
5 SH Not being used.

Connector data.
Number of poles. 5.
Pitch. 3.5 mm.
Connection technique. Screw connection.
Minimum/maximum tightening torque. 0.22 / 0.25 Nm.
Minimum/maximum section. 0.14 / 1.5 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 28 / 16.
CNCelite Rated current In. 8 A.
8058 8060 Cable data.
8065 8070 Length to be stripped. 7 mm.

See "4.9.9 CAN bus." on page 91.

REF: 2305

ꞏ68ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

ꞏB64ꞏ EtherCAT bus.


RJ45 connector for 4-wire cable.

Pin. Signal.
1 TD +
2 TD -
3 RD +
4 ---
5 ---
6 RD -
7
8
---
---

See "4.9.8 EtherCAT bus." on page 88.


4.

CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).


Hardware functionality (connectors).
ꞏE21ꞏ Local feedback input.

The feedback signals may be incremental (TTL, differential TTL, Vpp) or communication
protocols (SSI, FeeDat, EnDat, BiSS).
Plug-in part. 15-pin female SUB-D HD connector.
• Feedback signals (TTL, differential TTL, Vpp).

Pin. Signal. Function.


1 A Feedback signals.
2 /A
3 B
4 /B
5 I0 Reference signals.
6 /I0
7 AL Feedback alarm.
8 /AL
9 +5 V DC Voltage supply for the feedback system.
10 +5 V DC
11 GND 0 V reference signal.
12 GND
13/15 --- ---
Connect the cable shield to the connector housing at both ends.

• Communication protocols (SSI, EnDat, BiSS).

Pin. Signal. Function.


1 A Feedback signals.
2 /A
3 B
4 /B
5 DATA Data line.
6 /DATA
7 CLOCK Clock line.
8 /CLOCK
9 +5 V DC Voltage supply for the feedback system.
10 +5 V DC
11 GND Reference signal.
12 GND
13/15 --- ---
Connect the cable shield to the connector housing at both ends.

See "4.8.4 Feedback inputs." on page 77. See "4.9.4 Feedback


connection." on page 81.
CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ69ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

ꞏE36ꞏ Handwheel input (only for QC-C##-10K).

The LCD-10K model admits the connection of up to 3 handwheels (MPG1, MPG2 and
MPG3) with A and B signals (5 V DC TTL). If he handwheel has an axis selector button, the
button signal may be connected to a digital input and may be managed from the PLC using
the -NEXTMPGAXIS-mark.
Plug-in part. 10-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5
mm pitch).

Pin Signal Function

4.
1 +5 V Power supply.
2 --- ---
3 --- ---
4 MPG3-B B signal of the third handwheel.
CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).
Hardware functionality (connectors).

5 MPG3-A A signal of the third handwheel.


6 MPG2-B B signal of the second handwheel.
7 MPG2-A A signal of the second handwheel.
8 MPG1-B B signal of the first handwheel.
9 MPG1-A A signal of the first handwheel.
10 GND Power supply.
Always connect the shield of the cable to the ground plate using a
metallic clamp.

See "4.9.5 Handwheel connection (only QC-C##-10K)." on page 82.

ꞏF2Aꞏ Protection fuse.


The module has a F2A (fast 2A) fuse that may be accessed
from the outside to protect against over-voltage (greater than
36 V DC or 25 V AC).

ꞏH30Aꞏ USB 2.0 Ports.


ꞏH30Bꞏ USB 2.0 Ports (only QC-C65 / QC-C70).

• Do not run part programs from a USB device, whether it be when using a pendrive or external hard
drive. Fagor Automation recommends using the USB port only to exchanging data, such for
programs, reports, etc. If you require more storage space, then use a CFast disk.
• Do not connect any kind of hub to the USB port.

Type A, USB 2.0 connector.

Pin. Signal.
1 +5V
2 DT -
3 DT +
4 GND

See "4.9.3 Connecting the USB2.0 port." on page 80.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ70ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

ꞏH30Cꞏ USB 3.0 Port (only QC-C65 / QC-C70).

• Do not run part programs from a USB device, whether it be when using a pendrive or external hard
drive. Fagor Automation recommends using the USB port only to exchanging data, such for
programs, reports, etc. If you require more storage space, then use a CFast disk.
• Do not connect any kind of hub to the USB port.

Type A, USB 3.0 connector.

Pin. Signal.

4.
1 +5V
2 DT -
3 DT +
4 GND

CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).


Hardware functionality (connectors).
5 StdA_SSRX-
6 StdA_SSRX+
7 GND_DRAIN
8 StdA_SSTX-
9 StdA_SSTX+

ꞏH31Bꞏ Ethernet.
8-pin RJ45 connector and 2 status LED's.

Pin. 10Base-T (10/100 Mhz). 1000Base-T (1000 Mhz).


1 TX+ (transmit data). BI_DA+
2 TX- (transmit data). BI_DA-
3 RX+ (receive data). BI_DB+
4 --- BI_DC+
5 --- BI_DC-
6 RX- (receive data). BI_DB-
7 --- BI_DD+
8 --- BI_DD-
A Connection LED. The LED turns on when the central unit is
connected to network.
B Activity LED. The LED blinks when data is being transferred.

See "4.9.7 Connection to an Ethernet network." on page 87.

ꞏH62ꞏ CFast.

To help increase storage space, Fagor Automation lists several CFast cards in its catalog; when using
a third-party CFast, always use an industrial grade CFast SLC as these support temperatures from
between -40ºC and +85ºC (-40 ºF and 185 ºF) and can last five years with constant day-to-day writing.
Fagor Automation shall not be held responsible for any problems caused by using lower-quality CFast
cards.

Additional storage space for user programs.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ71ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

ꞏI23ꞏ Local digital inputs (16 inputs).

Always make one of the following connections.


• Conductors with a cross-section of 0.5 mm², use 10 mm long sleeveless tip. Maximum length of
the stripped end, 8 mm.
• Conductors with a cross-section of 0.34 mm², use 14.5 mm long sleeved tip. Length of ferrule, 10
mm. Maximum length of the stripped end, 12 mm.

The digital inputs do not need 24 V DC power. The power pin for this connector is joined internally to
i the I24 connector to power the digital outputs. It is not necessary to power both connectors.

4. Top connector.
CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).
Hardware functionality (connectors).

Pin 1 coded.
Inputs.
I23
Bottom connector.
Pin 9 coded.

Plug-in part. 2 coded connectors 9-pole Phoenix-contact


minicombicon connector (2.5 mm pitch).
• Top connector.
Pin. Signal. Function.
1 24 V 24 V DC voltage supply.
2-9 LI1 - LI8 Local digital inputs.
• Bottom connector.

Pin. Signal. Function.


1 GND 0 V reference signal.
2- 9 LI9 - LI16 Local digital inputs.
• Both connectors.

Connector data.
Number of poles. 9.
Pitch. 2.5 mm.
Connection technique. Spring connection.
Minimum/maximum section. 0.34 / 0.5 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 22 / 20.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped.
(ferrule with/without sleeve). 12 mm / 8 mm.

See "4.8.1 Digital inputs." on page 76.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ72ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

ꞏI24ꞏ Local digital outputs (8 outputs).

Always make one of the following connections.


• Conductors with a cross-section of 0.5 mm², use 10 mm long sleeveless tip. Maximum length of
the stripped end, 8 mm.
• Conductors with a cross-section of 0.34 mm², use 14.5 mm long sleeved tip. Length of ferrule, 10
mm. Maximum length of the stripped end, 12 mm.

The digital outputs can also be powered from the I23 connector (digital inputs). The power pins on both
i connectors are joined internally. It is not necessary to power both connectors.

4.

CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).


Hardware functionality (connectors).
Top connector.
Pin 1 coded.
Outputs.
I24
Bottom connector.
Pin 6 coded.

Plug-in part. 2 coded connectors 6-pole Phoenix-contact


minicombicon connector (2.5 mm pitch).
• Top connector.
Pin. Signal. Function.
1 24 V 24 V DC voltage supply.
2-3 LO1 - LO2 Local digital outputs. Use these pins for
PWM and synchronous switching.
4-5 LO3 - LO4 Local digital outputs.
6 GND 0 V reference signal.
• Bottom connector.

Pin. Signal. Function.


1 24 V 24 V DC voltage supply.
2- 5 LO5 - LO8 Local digital outputs.
6 GND 0 V reference signal.
• Both connectors.

Connector data.
Number of poles. 6.
Pitch. 2.5 mm.
Connection technique. Spring connection.
Minimum/maximum section. 0.34 / 0.5 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 22 / 20.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped.
(ferrule with/without sleeve). 12 mm / 8 mm.

See "4.8.2 Digital outputs." on page 76.


CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ73ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

ꞏI25ꞏ Probe input.


Plug-in part. 8-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm
pitch).

Pin. Signal. Description.


1 GND_5V 0 V reference signal for 5V.
2 +5 V 5 V output.
3 PRB1_IN5V 5 V input of probe 1.
4 PRB2_IN5V 5 V input of probe 2.
5 PRB1_IN24V 24 V input of probe 1.

4. 6
7
8
PRB2_IN24V
GND_24V
Chassis
24 V input of probe 2.
0 V reference signal for 24 V.
Shield.
CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).
Hardware functionality (connectors).

Connector data.
Number of poles. 5.
Pitch. 3.5 mm.
Connection technique. Screw connection.
Minimum/maximum tightening torque. 0.2 Nm.
Minimum/maximum section. 0.5 / 1.5 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 28 / 16.
Rated current In. 8 A.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped. 7 mm.

See "4.9.6 Probe connection." on page 84.

ꞏI26ꞏ General purpose ±10 V analog output (16 bits).


Plug-in part. 3-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm
pitch).

Pin Signal. Function.


1 GND 0 V reference signal.
2 AO Analog output.
3 SH Shield.

Connector data.
Number of poles. 3.
Pitch. 3.5 mm.
Connection technique. Screw connection.
Minimum/maximum tightening torque. 0.22 / 0.25 Nm.
Minimum/maximum section. 0.14 / 1.5 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 28 / 16.
Rated current In. 8 A.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped. 7 mm.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ74ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

ꞏX27ꞏ Relay for the emergency chain.


Plug-in part. 2-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm
pitch).

Pin. Signal. Function.


1 RELAY Relay for the emergency chain.
2 RELAY Relay for the emergency chain.

Connector data.
Number of poles. 2.

4.
Pitch. 3.5 mm.
Connection technique. Spring connection.
Minimum/maximum section. 0.2 / 1 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 24 / 16.

CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).


Hardware functionality (connectors).
Rated current In. 8 A.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped. 10 mm.

See "4.9.2 Connecting the relay for the emergency chain." on page
80.

ꞏI65ꞏ UPS control.


Plug-in part. 3-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm
pitch).

Pin Signal. Function.


1 DISABLE_BAT Potential-free relay.
2 DISABLE_BAT Potential-free relay.
3 BAT_MODE UPS status.

Connector data.
Number of poles. 3.
Pitch. 3.5 mm.
Connection technique. Spring connection.
Minimum/maximum section. 0.2 / 1 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 24 / 16.
Rated current In. 8 A.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped. 10 mm.

See "15 CNC-FPS." on page 285.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ75ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

4.8 Technical/electrical characteristics of the inputs and outputs.

4.8.1 Digital inputs.

All digital inputs are galvanically isolated up to 500 V through opto-couplers. All digital inputs
meet the standard IEC61131-2 type 1 and type 3.

Characteristic. Value.

Nominal voltage. +24 V DC (between +18 V DC and +30 V DC).

4. Activation level. From +11 V DC on and between 2.1 mA and


2.6 mA.
CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).
Technical/electrical characteristics of the inputs and outputs.

Deactivation level. Under +10 V DC or 1.5 mA.

4.8.2 Digital outputs.

For the PWM and synchronized switching, only pins LO1 or LO2 may be used. Depending on the input
receiving the PWM pulse and the cable, an external load resistor (at least 10% of rated current; if 24 V,
470  / 2 W) improves signal quality and noise immunity.

All digital outputs are galvanically isolated up to 500 V through opto-couplers. All the digital
outputs have the following characteristics:

Characteristic. Value.

Nominal voltage. +24 V DC (between +18 V DC and +30 V DC).


Output voltage. 2 V less than the supply voltage.

Maximum output current. 500 mA per output.

Minimum cycle on. Pins LO1 LO2: 25 µs.


Rest of pins: 75 µs.

4.8.3 Analog outputs.

Use shielded cables connecting their meshes to the corresponding shield pin. All the analog
outputs have the following characteristics:

Characteristic. Value.

Command voltage within range. ±10 V.

Resolution. 16 bits.

Minimum impedance of the connected device. 10 k.

Maximum cable length (unshielded). 75 mm.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ76ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

4.8.4 Feedback inputs.

The central unit has one feedback input. The feedback signals may be incremental (TTL,
differential TTL, Vpp) or communication protocols (SSI, FeeDat, EnDat, BiSS).

Characteristic. Value.

+5 V power consumption. 250 mA.

Work levels for TTL signal.

4.
A

CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).


Technical/electrical characteristics of the inputs and outputs.
B

Io

Characteristic. Value.

Maximum frequency: 100 kHz.

Phase difference: 90º ± 20º.

High threshold (logic level "1") VIH: 2,2 V < VIH < 5 V.

Low threshold (logic level "0") VIL: -1 V < VIL < 0,6 V.

Maximum voltage: -1 V ÷ 7 V

Hysteresis: 1.2 V.

Work levels for differential TTL signal.

Io

Io

Characteristic. Value.

Maximum frequency: 1000 kHz.

Phase difference: 90º ± 20º.

Maximum voltage in common mode: -1 V ÷ 7 V

Maximum voltage in differential mode: ± 6 V.


CNCelite
Hysteresis: 0.2 V.
8058 8060
Maximum differential input current: 50 mA.
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ77ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

Work levels for sinusoidal 1 Vpp signal.

V1 VApp
A
V2

VBpp
B

4.
CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).
Technical/electrical characteristics of the inputs and outputs.

Io VIopp

Characteristic. Value.

Maximum frequency: 500 kHz.

A and B signals. Amplitude: 0.6 ÷ 1.2 Vpp

A and B signals. Centered: |V1-V2| / 2 Vpp =< 6,5%


A and B signals. Ratio: VApp / VBpp = 0.8 ÷ 1.25

A and B signals. Phase shift: 90º ± 10º

I0 signal. Amplitude: 0.2 ÷ 0.85 V


I0 signal. Width: T-90º =< I0 =< T+180º

Work levels for SSI signal.

Clock sequ ence

t1 T t2

1 2 3 n-1 n

M SB LSB

Characteristic. Value.

Transmission: SSI synchronous serial transfer via RS 485.

Levels: EIA RS 485

Clock frequency: 100 kHz - 500 kHz

Maximum number of bits (n): 32 (configurable).

T: 2 µs to 10 µs

t1: > 1 µs

t2: 20 µs to 35 µs

SSI: Gray or binary (configurable).

Parity: Fully configurable.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ78ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

4.9 Connections.

Do not handle the connectors while the CNC is turned on (inputs/outputs, feedback, etc.). Make sure
that the device is not powered before handling the connectors.

Do not make any connections while the CNC is powered. Disconnect the power before making a
connection.

4.9.1 Ground connection.


4.

CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).


Connections.
It is up to the system integrator to meet all the requirements of local and national electrical codes as
well as all the regulations applicable regarding the grounding of the whole unit.

Connect the CNC ground terminal to the main ground terminal so that the EMC performs
properly. Before connecting the inputs and outputs, make sure that the ground connection
has been made.

CNC 8060/8065/8070.

Ground.

CNC 8058.

Ground.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

Handwheel shield REF: 2305


connection.

ꞏ79ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

4.9.2 Connecting the relay for the emergency chain.

Single-contact relay, normally open contact that closes when the CNC is powered up and
running properly; it opens again when the CNC is turned off or when an internal failure occurs.
The relay withstands up to 1 A at 24 V.

Connector pinout.

4. Plug-in part. 2-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm pitch).


Pin.
1
Signal.
RELAY
Function.
Relay for the emergency chain.
CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).
Connections.

2 RELAY Relay for the emergency chain.

4.9.3 Connecting the USB2.0 port.

• Do not run part programs from a USB device, whether it be when using a pendrive or external hard
drive. Fagor Automation recommends using the USB port only to exchanging data, such for
programs, reports, etc. If you require more storage space, then use a CFast disk.
• DO NOT connect any kind of hub to the USB port.

USB support for pen drives, hard drives, keyboards and mice; check with Fagor Automation
before connecting any other device.

Characteristics of the USB 2.0 cable.

Characteristic. Description.

Type. 28AWG/1P + 24AWG/2C construction cables with dual shielding


and ferrite cores on both ends. Recommended reference; CNC Tech
102-1030-BL-F0500.

Maximum length. 5 meters (16.40 ft).

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ80ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

4.9.4 Feedback connection.

The central unit has one feedback input. The feedback signals may be incremental (TTL,
differential TTL, Vpp) or communication protocols (SSI, FeeDat, EnDat, BiSS).

Connector pinout.
Plug-in part. 15-pin male SUB-D HD type connector.
Pin. Incremental signal.
TTL.
Differential TTL.
Protocol.
SSI.
EnDat.
4.

CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).


Connections.
1 Vpp sinusoidal. BiSS.
1 A A
2 /A /A
3 B B
4 /B /B
5 I0 DATA
6 /I0 /DATA
7 AL CLOCK
8 /AL /CLOCK
9 +5 V DC +5 V DC
10 +5 V DC +5 V DC
11 GND GND
12 GND GND
13 --- ---
14 --- ---
15 --- ---
Connect the cable shield to the connector housing at both ends.

Cable characteristics.

Fagor Automation offers a wide range of cables and extension cables to connect the feedback systems
to the CNC. The cable characteristics , as well as its length, depend on the type of feedback being
used. Refer to our catalog for further information.

We recommend to run the feedback cables as far away as possible from the power cables
of the machine.

The cable being used must have overall shield. The cable shield must be connected to the
metallic hood at each end. The unshielded portion of the wires of an unshielded cable cannot
be longer than 75 mm.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ81ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

4.9.5 Handwheel connection (only QC-C##-10K).

The LCD-10K model admits the connection of up to 3 handwheels (MPG1, MPG2 and
MPG3) with A and B signals (5 V DC TTL). If he handwheel has an axis selector button, the
button signal may be connected to a digital input and may be managed from the PLC using
the NEXTMPGAXIS mark. We recommend to run the handwheel cable as far away as
possible from the power cables of the machine.

4. Connector pinout.
10-pin male Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm pitch).
CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).
Connections.

Pin Signal Function


1 +5 V Power supply.
2 --- ---
3 --- ---
4 MPG3-B B signal of the third handwheel.
5 MPG3-A A signal of the third handwheel.
6 MPG2-B B signal of the second handwheel.
7 MPG2-A A signal of the second handwheel.
8 MPG1-B B signal of the first handwheel.
9 MPG1-A A signal of the first handwheel.
10 GND Power supply.

Shield connection (8060, 8065 and 8070).

Always connect the shield of the cable to the ground plate using a metallic clamp.

Handwheel cable.

Cable shield.

Ground plate.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ82ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

Shield connection (8058).

Always connect the shield of the cable to shield terminal above de connector.

Shield terminal.
4.

CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).


Connections.
Handwheel cable.

Cable shield.

Cable characteristics.
The cable being used must have overall shield. The unshielded portion of the wires of an
unshielded cable cannot be longer than 75 mm.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ83ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

4.9.6 Probe connection.

Connector pinout.
Plug-in part. 8-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm pitch).
Pin. Signal. Description.
1 GND_5V 0 V reference signal for 5V.
2 +5 V 5 V output.

4. 3
4
5
PRB1_IN5V
PRB2_IN5V
PRB1_IN24V
5 V input of probe 1.
5 V input of probe 2.
24 V input of probe 1.
CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).
Connections.

6 PRB2_IN24V 24 V input of probe 2.


7 GND_24V 0 V reference signal for 24 V.
8 Chassis Shield.

The CNC offers two 5 V probe inputs and two 24 V probe inputs. The following diagram
shows the first probe input (pins 1, 2 and 3 for 5 V or pins 5 and 7 for 24 V); for the second
input, it shows pins 1, 2, 4 for 5 V or pins 6 and 7 for 24 V. Pin 8 is used in all diagrams.

All the shields of the cables must be connected to ground only a the CNC through pin ꞏ8ꞏ
of the connector, leaving the other one free. The wires of the shielded cable must not be
longer than 75 mm without the protection shield.

Probe connection.

Probe whose output has a normally open contact. Connection to +5 V.

The connection acts upon the up flank (positive pulse) of the probe signal.

Probe whose output has a normally open contact. Connection to +24 V.

The connection acts upon the up flank (positive pulse) of the probe signal.

Probe whose output has a normally closed contact. Connection to +5 V.

The connection acts upon the up flank (positive pulse) of the probe signal.
CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ84ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

Probe whose output has a normally closed contact. Connection to +24 V.

The connection acts upon the up flank (positive pulse) of the probe signal.

4.

CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).


Connections.
Interface with an open-collector output. Connection to +5 V.

The connection acts upon the down flank (negative pulse) of the probe signal.

Interface with an open-collector output. Connection to +24 V.

The connection acts upon the down flank (negative pulse) of the probe signal.

Interface with a PUSH-PULL output. Connection to +5 V.


Depending on the interface being used, the connection acts upon the up flank or down flank
of the probe signal.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ85ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

Interface with a PUSH-PULL output. Connection to +24 V.

Depending on the interface being used, the connection acts upon the up flank or down flank
of the probe signal.

4.
CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).
Connections.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ86ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

4.9.7 Connection to an Ethernet network.

The Ethernet connection enables the CNC to be configured as another node in the local
network, thus being able to communicate with other CNCs or PCs to transfer files, run
telediagnoses, etc. The Ethernet connection also enables direct connection (point to point
connection) to another CNC or PC.

Connector.
The RJ45 port has two LEDs to indicate whether the CNC is connected to the network (green
LED) and if data are being transmitted (yellow LED).
4.

CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).


Connections.
LED. Meaning.
A (green) Connection LED. The LED turns on when the CNC
is connected to the data network.
B (yellow) Activity LED. The LED blinks when data is being
received/transferred.

Cable characteristics.
Use a specific Ethernet cable with the following characteristics.

Characteristic. Description.

Type. 10/100 MHz connection Cat.5 (100  - 120 ) or greater.


1000 MHz connection Cat.5e (100  - 120 ) or greater.
Use a crossed cable to connect for the point to point connection to
the CNC.

Maximum length. 100 meters (328 ft).

Transmission speed.
The CNC permits a connection at 10, 100 or 1000 MHz; by default, it is configured for a
connection at 10 MHz. Use a cable having the recommended characteristics to ensure a
transmission at 100 MHz or 1000 MHz. Even so, since the transmission speed depends on
the configuration of the network (number of nodes, their configuration, etc.) a 100 MHz or
1000 MHz transmission might not be stable. In these cases, we recommend to lower the
transmission speed.

Element connection.
In order to ensure proper performance, the connection cable must be inserted all the way
into the connectors so they're latched. This ensures that the cable is properly latched and
does not come off due to vibration.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ87ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

4.9.8 EtherCAT bus.

• To connect third-party I/Os modules, first acquire the software option “SOFT THIRD PARTY IOs”.
i • To connect third-party drives, first acquire the software option “SOFT THIRD PARTY DRIVES”.

EtherCAT is an Ethernet-based communication protocol for connecting the CNC to remote


I/Os profile modules or drives (proprietary or third-party). EtherCAT is configured as an inline
topology, where the CNC is the master and the other resources are distributed by nodes (up
to 32). The bus master interprets the ENI (EtherCAT Network Information) files generated

4. by a configurator and initializes the slaves connected to the bus.

This bus is compatible with the CAN bus, responsible for the management of keyboards and
operator panels. The CNC may have remote I/Os on both buses simultaneously
CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).
Connections.

(CAN/EtherCAT), provided that both buses are not using the same PLC resources.

Bus EtherCAT with CNC (master), RIOW-E Inline and BCSD nodes.

Node 2

Master

Node 1
Node n

B64 X1(IN) X2(OUT) CN3 CN4


EtherCAT bus

Resources available on the bus.

Resources of the bus. Total in the bus.


Digital inputs. 1024

Digital outputs. 1024

General purpose analog inputs. 40


General purpose analog outputs. 40

Analog inputs for Pt100 temperature sensors. 10

Drives (BCSD and third party). 32

Connector.
RJ45 connector for 4-wire cable.
Pin. Signal.
1 TD +
2 TD -
3 RD +
4 ---
5 ---
6 RD -
7 ---
CNCelite 8 ---
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ88ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

Cable characteristics.

Use a specific EtherCAT cable. EtherCAT cables should never be installed next to power cables and
they should never cross over each other at a 90 degree angle.

Fagor Automation supplies the required cables for EtherCAT communication; when using
third-party cables, these must be of the same category as those supplied by Fagor (see
tables). There are different types of cables depending on length and dynamic and static
installation characteristics.

ECAT-CABLE cable
4.

CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).


Connections.
Type. Industrial Cat 6A shielded 8-wire Ethernet cable (twisted pairs).

Diameter. 6.3 mm - 6.9 mm.

Flexibility. Minimum static bending radius 4 x diameter.


Minimum dynamic bending radius 8 x diameter.

Covering. PVC. Polyvinyl chloride.

Temperature. Work: -20 ºC / 80 ºC (-4 ºF / 176 ºF).


Storage: -20 ºC / 80 ºC (-4 ºF / 176 ºF).

Color. Yellow, RAL 1021.


Minimum/maximum length. 1 m (3.2 ft) / 7 m (23 ft).

ECAT-CABLE-FLEX cable

Type. Industrial Cat 6A shielded 8-wire Ethernet cable (twisted pairs).


Diameter. 6.3 mm - 6.9 mm.

Flexibility. Minimum static bending radius 4 x diameter.


Minimum dynamic bending radius 8 x diameter.

Covering. PUR. Polyurethane.

Temperature. Work: -40 ºC / 80 ºC (-40 ºF / 176 ºF).


Storage: -40 ºC / 80 ºC (-40 ºF / 176 ºF).

Color. Yellow, RAL 1021.

Minimum/maximum length. 10 m (32.8 ft) / 100 m (328 ft).

Bus configuration.

Refer to the installation manual for further information on installing and using the EtherCAT configurator
and mapper.

Element connection.

Use an inline topology. Join the B64 connector of the CNC to the X1(IN) connector of the
first header. Connect the other of headers, joining the X2 (OUT) connector of one header
with the X1 (IN) connector of the following one. Do not connect the X2(OUT) connector of
the last header.

In order to ensure proper performance, the connection cable must be inserted all the way
into the connectors so they're latched. This ensures that the cable is properly latched and
does not come off due to vibration.
CNCelite
Module identification. 8058 8060
The node number for each header is not defined on this bus. The node number is assigned 8065 8070
by the configurator on the basis of its designed topology.

Transmission speed. REF: 2305

The transmission speed is 100 MHz. Use a cable having the recommended characteristics
to ensure this speed.

ꞏ89ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

Configuring the EtherCAT bus.

Fagor supplies the configurator “KPA EtherCAT Studio” (by Koening-pa GmbH) under
license, which can operate both online and offline, to define the bus topology and create the
ENI file containing the bus device information. This file must be copied to the folder
../Mtb/Data of the CNC with the name "fagor_ethercatConfFile.xml". This file also uses the
"Fagor EtherCAT Mapper" program for determining the resources available in the bus.

Mapping the bus resources.

4.
The mapping consists of allocating among the available resources in the bus and the PLC
resources (inputs, outputs or registers). The digital inputs and outputs are mapped to
resources of the same type in the PLC. Analog inputs and outputs are mapped to PLC
registers.
CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).
Connections.

Fagor has the "Fagor EtherCAT Mapper" program to carry out the mapping. From the ENI
file generated by the EtherCAT configurator, this program makes a mapping proposal. The
user can accept this proposal or perform the necessary modifications, all in a way that helps
ensure there are no duplicated resources. Once the mapping is completed, this software
creates a file with the description of the routing. This file must be copied to the folder
../Mtb/Data of the CNC with the name "resourceRouterConf.xml".

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ90ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

4.9.9 CAN bus.

CANopen is a network communication protocol based on the CAN bus system for connecting
the CNC with remote modules and keyboards. The CAN connection supports up to 32
devices (nodes), including the central unit; more one than keyboard and several groups of
remote modules are possible.

CAN bus with CNC (master) and RIOR modules.

Master

Node 1 Node 2 Node n 4.

CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).


Connections.
B28 B28A B28B B28A B28B
CAN bus.

CAN connector.
Plug-in part. 5-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm
pitch).

Pin. Signal. Function.


1 GND Ground / 0 V.
2 CL (LOW) bus signal.
3 SH CAN shield.
4 CH (HIGH) bus signal.
5 SH Not being used.

The cable shield must be connected to the connector at both ends. The connector has two
shield pins. Both pins are equivalent; the CAN shield may be connected to either one.

Characteristics of the CAN cable.


Use a specific CAN cable. The ends of all the wires and the shield must be protected by the
corresponding terminal (pin). Also use the terminals (pins) to secure the cable to the
connector.

Characteristic. Description.

Type. Shielded. Twisted pair (1 x 2 x 0.22 mm²).


Flexibility. Extremely flexible. Minimum bending radius, static = 50 mm and
dynamic = 95 mm.

Cover. PUR

Impedance. Cat.5 (100 - 120 )

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ91ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

Interconnection of modules.
Respect the cable's minimum bending radius when connecting it. They must be connected
in series; on elements having two CAN connectors, either one may be used. Once the
elements have been connected, define their logic order in the bus and the transmission
speed.

Remote modules of the RIOR and RIO5 series.

4. CNC

ADDRESS = 0
BCD
JOG PANEL

ADDRESS = 3
B CD
MODULE 1

ADDRESS = 1
BCD
MODULE 2

ADDRESS = 2
BCD

F0 1

F0 1

F0 1

F0 1
78 9

78 9

78 9

78 9
3 45 34 5 34 5 34 5
CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).
Connections.

ADD MSB = 0 ADD MSB = 0


Line Term = 1 Line Term = 0 Line Term = 0 Line Term = 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

X2 X2 X2
ISO GND ISO GND ISO GND ISO GND
CAN L CAN L CAN L CAN L
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD
CAN H CAN H CAN H CAN H
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD

X3 X3 X3
ISO GND ISO GND ISO GND
CAN L CAN L CAN L
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD
CAN H CAN H CAN H
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD

The drawing shows the CAN connection between the CPU (central unit), the
operator panel and 2 groups of RIOR or RIO5 series remote modules.

RIOW series remote modules.

CNC JOG PANEL MODULE 1 MODULE 2

BCD B CD
4 4
ADDRESS = 0 ADDRESS = 3 3 ADDRESS = 1 3 ADDRESS = 2
F0 1

F0 1
78 9

78 9

3 45 34 5
2 2
1 1
ON ON
Line Term = 1 Line Term = 0
0 1 0 1

X2
ISO GND ISO GND
CAN L CAN L
SHIELD SHIELD
CAN H CAN H
SHIELD SHIELD

X3
ISO GND ISO GND
CAN L CAN L
SHIELD SHIELD
CAN H CAN H
SHIELD SHIELD

The drawing shows the CAN connection between the CPU (central unit), the
CNCelite operator panel and 2 groups of RIOW series remote modules.
8058 8060
8065 8070
Module identification at the bus.
REF: 2305
Each one of the elements integrated into the CAN bus is identified by its address or node
number. For the central unit, the node number is factory defined with "0", because the CNC
is always at one end of the bus. The rest of the elements of the bus will occupy consecutive
positions starting with "1".

ꞏ92ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

Identification of the first and last elements of the bus. Line


terminating resistor.
In the CAN bus, it is necessary to use a line terminating resistor to identify which are the
elements that occupy the ends of the bus; i.e. the first and last physical element in the
connection. For the central unit, the terminating resistor is factory installed because the CNC
is always at one end of the bus.

Selecting the speed for the CANopen bus.


When using the CANopen protocol, the transmission speed at the bus is defined in each node
4.
and they all must run at the same speed. The transmission speed depends on the total length

CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).


Connections.
of the bus. Using the following illustrative values; assigning other values may cause
communication errors due to signal distortion.

Speed Length of the CAN bus.

1000 kHz Up to 20 meters.

800 kHz From 20 to 40 meters.

500 kHz From 40 to 100 meters.

250 kHz From 100 to 500 meters.


The speed of 250 kHz is only available to communicate with the keyboards and
RIOW and RIOR series remote modules; this speed is not available for the RIO5
series remote modules.

Selecting the speed at the CNC.

At the CNC, the transmission speed is selected by means of the machine parameters
(parameter CANOPENFREQ).

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ93ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

4.9.10 Sercos III bus.

Refer to the manual man_qc-pds_hard.pdf for further information on the drive connections.
i
Sercos III is an Ethernet-based communication protocol (IEEE 802.3 and ISO / IEC 8802-
3 compliant), which connects the CNC to the drives. Sercos III is configured as an inline
topology, where the CNC is the master and the other resources are distributed by nodes (up
to 32).

4. Sercos III bus with CNC (master) and QC-DR drives.

Node 1 Node 2
CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).
Connections.

Master
Node n

B10 B10B B10A B10B B10A


Sercos III bus.

Connector.
RJ45 connector for 4-wire cable.

Pin. Signal.
1 TD +
2 TD -
3 RD +
4 ---
5 ---
6 RD -
7 ---
8 ---

Cable characteristics.

Use a cable specifically for Sercos III.

Fagor Automation supplies the required cables for Sercos III communication; when using
third-party cables, these must be of the same category as those supplied by Fagor (see
tables). There are different types of cables depending on length and dynamic and static
installation characteristics.

QC-FBC cable
Type. Industrial Cat 5A Sercos III shielded 4-wire cable (twisted pairs).
Suitable for flexible assemblies.

Diameter. 6.3 mm - 6.7 mm.

CNCelite Flexibility. Minimum static bending radius 3 x diameter.


Minimum dynamic bending radius 5 x diameter.
8058 8060 Torsional strength: ±180º over 1 meter, 30,000 cycles.
8065 8070
Covering. PVC. Polyvinyl chloride.

Temperature. Fixed operation: -40 ºC / 70 ºC (-40 ºF / 158 ºF).


REF: 2305 Flexible operation: -20 ºC / 60 ºC (-4 ºF / 140 ºF).
Color. Green, RAL 6018.

Minimum/maximum length. 1 m (3.2 ft) / 7 m (23 ft).

ꞏ94ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

QC-FBC-FLEX cable

Type. Industrial Cat 5C Sercos III shielded 4-wire cable (twisted pairs).
Suitable for flexible assemblies, especially cable carrying chains.

Diameter. 6.3 mm - 6.7 mm.

Flexibility. Minimum static bending radius 3 x diameter.


Minimum dynamic bending radius 7 x diameter.
Torsional strength: ±180º over 1 meter, 30,000 cycles.

Covering. PUR. Polyurethane.

Temperature. Fixed operation: -40 ºC / 70 ºC (-40 ºF / 158 ºF).


Flexible operation: -20 ºC / 60 ºC (-4 ºF / 140 ºF).
4.

CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).


Connections.
Color. Green, RAL 6018.

Minimum/maximum length. 10 m (32.8 ft) / 100 m (328 ft).

Bus configuration.

Element connection.

Use an inline topology. Join the B10 connector of the CNC to the B10B connector of the first
drive. Connect the drives together by joining the B10A connector of one drive to the B10B
connector of the other drive. The B10A connector of the last drive is not connected.

In order to ensure proper performance, the connection cable must be inserted all the way
into the connectors so they're latched. This ensures that the cable is properly latched and
does not come off due to vibration.

Module identification.

The node number for each drive is not defined on this bus. The CNC identifies the drives
according to the order in which they are connected.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ95ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

4.
CENTRAL UNIT (INTEGRATED MODEL).
Connections.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ96ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

5 CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY


OF VESA MOUNTING).

Do not get into the inside of the unit. This unit MUST NOT be opened by unauthorized personnel. Only
personnel authorized by Fagor Automation may access the interior of this unit.

Module. Differences.

5.
QC-U58 • In-cabinet Central Unit.
QC-U60 • Possibility of VESA mounting.
QC-U65
QC-U70

CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ97ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

5.1 Specifications.

The machine manufacturer must comply with the EN 60204-1 (IEC-204-1) regulation
regarding electrical shocks in case of defective input/output pins with external power supply
when not plugging the connector before turning the power supply on.

Specifications. Description.

General. • In-cabinet Central Unit


• Possibility of VESA mounting.

5. • Dimensions (width x height x depth)


- 36.5 × 313.1 × 235.5 mm.
- 1.43" × 12.32" × 9.27".
CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF
Specifications.

Operating conditions. • Equipment for indoor use in non-hazardous locations, operated by


qualified personnel skilled in its use.
• The equipment must be installed in an enclosure that meets the
requirements described in this manual.
• Equipment designed for use in fixed locations.
• Equipment not suitable for wet areas.
• Never use in explosive environments (dangerous areas).

System. • Processor (depending on the model):


- CP-IC-E352-2-2.
- CP-IC-E354-4-4.
- CP-IM-BT52-2-2.
• Non-volatile RAM (FRAM).
- 4 GB.
• Storage (depending on the model):
(SO, CNC and user programs).
- Internal 15 GB (only 8058).
- Internal 16/20 GB (only 8060).
- Internal 16/20/40 GB (only 8065 and 8070).
• Storage expansion (optional):
(user programs).
- CFast 32 GB.
- CFast 128 GB.
• Without fan.
• Without battery.
• SO:
- Windows 10 (32 bits multi-touch).
Regulations. • It complies with the European directives for electromagnetic
compatibility 2014/30/EU and low voltage 2014/35/EU. See the
declaration of conformity, available on our website.
• UL 61010-1 (Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use - Part 1: General
Requirements). See the certificate, available on our website.
• IEC/UL 61010-2-201 (Safety requirements for elecrical equipement for
measurement, control and laboratory use. Particular requirements for
control equipment).
• Canadian Standards Associations: CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process
Control Equipement).

Packaging. • The package meets the regulation EN 60068-2-32 procedure 1 with a


random fall from a height not greater than 1 m.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ98ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

Specifications. Description.

Ambient. • Storage and transport temperature:


- Between -40 ºC (-40 ºF) and +70 ºC (158 ºF).
• CNC working temperature:
- Between 5 ºC (41 ºF) and 55 ºC (131 ºF).
• Working temperature outside the cabinet:
- Between 5 ºC (41 ºF) and 40 ºC (104 ºF).
• Working temperature inside the cabinet:
- Between 5 ºC (41 ºF) and 55 ºC (131 ºF).
• Relative humidity:
- 20 ~ 85% RH without condensation.
• Pollution degree 2.
5.

CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF


Specifications.
• Maximum work altitude:
- The unit must work properly at 2000 m according to IEC 61131-2.
• Vibration test according to IEC 60068-2-6 with a frequency step of
1 octave/minute (±10%) and a duration of 10 sweeps.
- 5 Hz  f  8.4 Hz; movement of constant 3.5 mm amplitude (peak
value).
- 8.4 Hz  f  150 Hz; 1g acceleration and constant amplitude (peak
value).
• Degree of protection according to EN 60529:
- IP20.
• Pollution degree 2 according to IEC/UL 61010-1.

Electrical. • Connection to mains supply: Permanent.


• Operating conditions: Continuous.
• Protection against electric shock: Class III (PE connection is only for
functional earthing).
• OVC I protection level according to IEC/UL 61010-1.
Power supply. • Use a regulated 24 V DC power supply (between -15% and +20%) and
2 A (including voltage ripple and noise). The power supply must meet the
UL1950 standard.

Connectivity. • 4 USB 2.0 ports


• 1 USB 3.0 port (only 8065 and 8070).
• 2 Ethernet ports for 10/100/1000 BaseT connection.
• 1 DVI-D video output (maximun resolution of 1920×1200).
• CAN Bus (CANopen).
• Sercos III bus.
• EtherCAT bus.

Inputs/outputs. • 16 opto-coupled digital inputs (24 V DC).


- IEC61131-2 type 1 and type 3 compliant.
• 8 opto-coupled digital outputs (24 V DC, 500 mA).
- ON cycle: minimum 75 µs (25 µs, optional in two of them).
• 1 analog outputs (±10 V, 16-bit resolution).
• 1 feedback inputs (5 V, 250 mA).
- Incremental TTL signal, differential TTL or 1 Vpp.
- SSI, EnDat or full digital BiSS communication protocols.
- Frequency: 100 kHz (TTL) / 1000 kHz (TTL differential) / 500 kHz (1
Vpp).
• 1 relay with one normally open contact (1A at 24V).
• 2 probe inputs (5 V or 24 V)
• 1 entry for UPS unit control.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ99ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

5.1.1 Conditions of acceptabity for NRTL certification.

• This equipment is for indoor use in non-hazardous locations, operated by qualified


personnel skilled in its use.
• The equipement shall be supplied with the specified rated voltages according to the
hardware manual.
• The nature of the installation where it is connected must not exceed OVC II.
• The equipment fullfils the requirements of the tested standars only if it is operated

5.
according to the hardware manual.
• The end application has to fulfill the requirements for resistance to mechanical stresses.
• To meet IP 54, the system must be installed in an appropiate enclosure according to the
CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF
Specifications.

hardware manual.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ100ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

5.2 Dimensions.

a c

5.

CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF


Dimensions.
Db d b

Ra

Ra
Da

mm inch mm inch
CNCelite
a 235.5 9.27 Da 16.5 0.65
8058 8060
b 313.1 12.32 Db 301.5 11.87 8065 8070
c 36.5 1,43
mm inch
d 284 11.18
Ra R 2.25 R 0.89 REF: 2305

ꞏ101ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

5.3 Enclosure and securing of the modules.

5.3.1 Ambient characteristics of the cabinet.

The central unit must be installed inside an electrical cabinet with a protection rating of IP54
or higher. The ventilation for the electrical cabinet must be enough to dissipate the heat
generated by all the devices and components working inside. The interior temperature of
the cabinet must not exceed 55ºC (113ºF) while the unit is running.

5. Dissipated power.
CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF
Enclosure and securing of the modules.

The modules generate heat and when trying to decide whether the electrical cabinet needs
external cooling or not, one must know the power dissipated by each one of its modules. The
power dissipated by the central unit is 25 watts.

5.3.2 Cabinet design.

The enclosure must meet the following requirements:


• Protection degree: IP 54 minimun (according to EN 60529).
• Protection degree: IK 08 minimun (according to IEC 62262).
• Enclosures complying with UL 50 and/or UL 50E and CSA C22.2 Nos. 94.1 or 94.3 for
the intended application, need not be subjected to the applicable requirements in this
standard. Non-metallic materials of enclosures complying with the above standards,
relied upon for containment of fire within the equipment, shall have a minimun
flammability rating of V-1.

5.3.3 Ventilation.

Leave a clearance of at least 50 mm (1.97 inches) above and below the module as well as
on the side (where the ventilation slots are located) to allow air to flow and heat to dissipate.

mm inch

A 50 1.97

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ102ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

5.3.4 Securing the module.

When attaching the module, the following requirements must be met.


• Place the modules in a vertical position.
• To secure the module, use the holes and slots made for that purpose. Vibrations should
be avoided. If necessary use securing means made of a material which absorbs or
minimizes vibrations.
• Respect the minimum distances recommended between the enclosure walls and the

5.
central unit to let the air flow and improve heat dissipation.

CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF


Enclosure and securing of the modules.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ103ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

5.4 VESA mount.

1 Attach the "VESA Mount" accessory to the monitor.

5.
CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF
VESA mount.

4 M4x10 screws.
Tightening torque: 2,1 Nm

2 Attach the CNC central unit to the VESA Mount accessory.

7 M3x8 screws.
Tightening torque: 0,7 Nm

3 Connect the USB and DVI-D cables.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

USB cable. DVI-D cable.

ꞏ104ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

5.5 Power supply for the module.

Do not connect the module to a power supply that is turned on. Before connecting the module, turn
off the power supply off by unplugging the power cable.

5.

CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF


Power supply for the module.
Over-voltage
protection fuse.

Power supply.

5.5.1 Protection against over-voltage and reverse voltage.

Protection against over-voltage and reverse voltage. The central unit has a F2A fuse that
may be accessed from the outside to protect against over-voltage (greater than 36 V DC or
25 V AC). The central unit is also protected against reverse connection of the power supply.

5.5.2 Voltage supply at 24 V DC.

• Universal DC power supply. Use a regulated 24 V DC power supply (between -15% and
+20%) and 2 A (including voltage ripple and noise). See "5.5.5 Specs of the power
supply." on page 106.
• The unit must be powered with class DVC A power supply with a SELV/PELV protection
output voltage.
• For all connections and terminals of electronic modules, use only power supplies that
provide SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) or PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage) output
voltages.

5.5.3 Power supply via UPS. CNCelite


8058 8060
See chapter "15 CNC-FPS.".
8065 8070

REF: 2305
5.5.4 Ground connection.

See "5.9.1 Ground connection." on page 123.

ꞏ105ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

5.5.5 Specs of the power supply.

Power the central unit with an external regulated 24V power supply with the following
characteristics. The power supply must meet the UL1950 standard.
• Output voltage.
24 V DC (between -15% and +20%) and 2 A (including voltage ripple and noise).
• Output current.
The continuous load current must be greater than the current consumed by the CNC (2 A)

5. (at the maximum temperature inside the electrical cabinet - enclosure - where the power
supply is).
• Load fluctuations (including the current peak due to the load).
CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF
Power supply for the module.

The output voltage must not exceed the previous limits (20.4 V ÷ 28.8 V), due to load
fluctuations.
• Output voltage holding time after an instantaneous power interruption.
10 ms (for an interruption of 100%) / 20 ms (for an interruption of 50%).

Instantaneous interruption.
(100 %) (50 %)

Input AC voltage

28.8 V
Output voltage

20.4 V

Output current
Sudden load
0A
change

Noise.

Voltage ripple.

Noise.

Example of voltage ripple and noise due to the switching power supply.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ106ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

5.5.6 Connection of the power supply to the line voltage.

The power supply used to power the touch screen elements (CNC, Panel PC and monitor) must always
be connected to the line voltage before the mains filter. This connection provides a "clean" power
supply, avoiding noise and conducted disturbances from the drive.

5.

CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF


Power supply for the module.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ107ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

5.5.7 NOT recommended circuits.

The following types of circuits should NOT be used.


1 Examples of circuits that cannot maintain the output voltage in an instantaneous
interruption (the output voltage drops under 20.4 V).

Example 1. Not recommended diagram.

5. AC input
Rectifier circuit
CNC
CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF
Power supply for the module.

A rectifier circuit is a circuit that uses diodes for full wave rectification.

Example 2. Not recommended diagram.

Rectifier circuit +
AC input CNC

A rectifier circuit is a circuit that uses diodes for full wave rectification.

2 Examples of circuits that exceed the output voltage range (20.4 V to 28.8 V) due to load
fluctuations. For these circuits, use a regulated second phase to power devices with large
load fluctuations so as not to affect the CNC and other units.

Example 1. Not recommended diagram.

Regulated
AC input power supply CNC

Device with large load


fluctuations.

Example 2. Not recommended diagram.

Regulated
AC input power supply CNC

CNCelite Device with high peak


8058 8060 currents due to load
(rush current).
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ108ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

5.6 Non-volatile RAM (FRAM).

The CNC has non-volatile RAM (FRAM) that keeps the information saved in it even when
a power failure occurs. The non-volatile RAM (FRAM) always saves the position of the axes,
the rest of the data that it saves is determined by machine parameters, like for example, PLC
registers (parameter BKUPREG), common arithmetic parameters (parameter BKUPCUP),
etc.

5.

CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF


Non-volatile RAM (FRAM).

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ109ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

5.7 Hardware functionality (connectors).

5.7.1 Front.

5. H66
CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF
Hardware functionality (connectors).

H30

D63

B10

B64

B28

E21

I26

I25

Connector.

ꞏB28ꞏ CAN bus. See Page 112.

ꞏB10ꞏ Sercos III bus. See Page 112.

CNCelite ꞏD63ꞏ Led See Page 113.

8058 8060 ꞏB64ꞏ EtherCAT bus. See Page 113.


8065 8070 ꞏE21ꞏ Local feedback input. See Page 113.
ꞏH30Aꞏ Type A USB 2.0 port. See Page 114.
ꞏH30Bꞏ
REF: 2305
ꞏH30Cꞏ

ꞏI25ꞏ Probe input. See Page 118.

ꞏI26ꞏ General purpose ±10 V analog output (16 bits). See Page 118.

ꞏH66ꞏ DVI-D video output. See Page 115.

ꞏ110ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

5.7.2 Top.

H31 H30 H61 H62

5.

CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF


Hardware functionality (connectors).
Connector.

ꞏH30Dꞏ Type A USB 2.0 port. See Page 114.

ꞏH31Aꞏ Ethernet. See Page 114.


ꞏH31Bꞏ

ꞏH61ꞏ Type A USB 3.0 port (only 8065 and 8070). See Page 114.

ꞏH62ꞏ CFast See Page 115.

Ground connection.

5.7.3 Bottom.

X27 I24 I23 I65 A22 F2A

Connector.
ꞏA22ꞏ 24 V supply input. See Page 112.

ꞏF2Aꞏ Protection fuse. See Page 114.

ꞏI23ꞏ Local digital inputs. See Page 116.


ꞏI24ꞏ Local digital outputs. See Page 117.

ꞏI65ꞏ UPS control. See Page 119.

ꞏX27ꞏ Relay for the emergency chain. See Page 119.


CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ111ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

5.7.4 Connector identification.

All the equipment connectors are polarized (they can only be connected in one sense) and those that
i are exactly the same are also coded by coding pins to prevent incorrect or accidental connection,
respectively.

ꞏA22ꞏ 24 V DC supply input.


Plug-in part. 3-pole Phoenix-contact combicon connector (5.08 mm
pitch).

5. Pin
1
Signal. Function.
- - -.
CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF
Hardware functionality (connectors).

2 GND 0 V reference signal.


3 +24 V Power supply.

Connector data.
Number of poles. 3.
Pitch. 5.08 mm.
Connection technique. Screw connection.
Minimum/maximum tightening torque. 0.5 / 0.6 Nm.
Minimum/maximum section. 0.2 / 2.5 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 24 / 12.
Rated current In. 12 A.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped. 7 mm.
See "5.5 Power supply for the module." on page 105.

ꞏB10ꞏ Sercos III bus.


RJ45 connector for 4-wire cable.
Pin. Signal.
1 TD +
2 TD -
3 RD +
4 ---
5 ---
6 RD -
7 ---
8 ---

See "5.9.9 Bus Sercos-III." on page 133.

ꞏB28ꞏ CAN bus.


Plug-in part. 5-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm
pitch).

Pin. Signal. Function.


1 GND Ground / 0 V.
2 CL (LOW) bus signal.
3 SH CAN shield.
4 CH (HIGH) bus signal.
5 SH Not being used.

Connector data.
Number of poles. 5.
CNCelite Pitch. 3.5 mm.
8058 8060 Connection technique. Screw connection.
Minimum/maximum tightening torque. 0.22 / 0.25 Nm.
8065 8070 Minimum/maximum section. 0.14 / 1.5 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 28 / 16.
Rated current In. 8 A.
REF: 2305
Cable data.
Length to be stripped. 7 mm.

See "5.9.10 CAN bus." on page 135.

ꞏ112ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

ꞏB64ꞏ EtherCAT bus.


RJ45 connectors for 4-wire cable.

Pin. Signal.
1 TD +
2 TD -
3 RD +
4 ---
5 ---
6 RD -
7
8
---
---

See "5.9.8 EtherCAT bus." on page 130.


5.

CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF


Hardware functionality (connectors).
ꞏD63ꞏ Led "Status".
Its meaning depends on the blinking frequency.

Type of blinking. Meaning.


Led off. There is no tensión.
Orenge led. The CNC does not start.
Green-red flash. Starting up.
Green blinking Operating CNC.

ꞏE21ꞏ Local feedback input.

The feedback signals may be incremental (TTL, differential TTL, Vpp) or communication
protocols (SSI, FeeDat, EnDat, BiSS).
Plug-in part. 15-pin female SUB-D HD connector.
• Feedback signals (TTL, differential TTL, Vpp).
Pin. Signal. Function.
1 A Feedback signals.
2 /A
3 B
4 /B
5 I0 Reference signals.
6 /I0
7 AL Feedback alarm.
8 /AL
9 +5 V DC Voltage supply for the feedback system.
10 +5 V DC
11 GND 0 V reference signal.
12 GND
13/15 --- ---
Connect the cable shield to the connector housing at both ends.

• Communication protocols (SSI, EnDat, BiSS).

Pin. Signal. Function.


1 A Feedback signals.
2 /A
3 B
4 /B
5 DATA Data line.
6 /DATA
7 CLOCK Clock line. CNCelite
8 /CLOCK 8058 8060
9 +5 V DC Voltage supply for the feedback system.
10 +5 V DC
8065 8070
11 GND Reference signal.
12 GND
REF: 2305
13/15 --- ---
Connect the cable shield to the connector housing at both ends.

See "5.8.4 Feedback inputs." on page 121. See "5.9.5 Feedback


connection." on page 125.

ꞏ113ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

ꞏF2Aꞏ Protection fuse.


The module has a F2A (fast 2A) fuse that may be accessed
from the outside to protect against over-voltage (greater than
36 V DC or 25 V AC).

5. ꞏH30ꞏ USB 2.0 port.


CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF
Hardware functionality (connectors).

• Do not run part programs from a USB device, whether it be when using a pendrive or external hard
drive. Fagor Automation recommends using the USB port only to exchanging data, such for
programs, reports, etc. If you require more storage space, then use a CFast disk.
• DO NOT connect any kind of hub to the USB port.

Type A, USB 2.0 connector.

Pin. Signal.
1 +5V
2 DT -
3 DT +
4 GND

See "5.9.2 Connecting the USB2.0 port." on page 123.

ꞏH31ꞏ Ethernet.
8-pin RJ45 connector and 2 status LED's.

Pin. 10Base-T (10/100 Mhz). 1000Base-T (1000 Mhz).


1 TX+ (transmit data). BI_DA+
2 TX- (transmit data). BI_DA-
3 RX+ (receive data). BI_DB+
4 --- BI_DC+
5 --- BI_DC-
6 RX- (receive data). BI_DB-
7 --- BI_DD+
8 --- BI_DD-
A Connection LED. The LED turns on when the central unit is
connected to network.
B Activity LED. The LED blinks when data is being transferred.

See "5.9.7 Connection to an Ethernet network." on page 129.

ꞏH61ꞏ USB 3.0 port.

• Do not run part programs from a USB device, whether it be when using a pendrive or external hard
drive. Fagor Automation recommends using the USB port only to exchanging data, such for
programs, reports, etc. If you require more storage space, then use a CFast disk.
• DO NOT connect any kind of hub to the USB port.

CNCelite Type A, USB 3.0 connector.


8058 8060 Pin. Signal.
8065 8070 1 +5V
2 DT -
3 DT +
REF: 2305 4 GND
5 StdA_SSRX-
6 StdA_SSRX+
7 GND_DRAIN
8 StdA_SSTX-
9 StdA_SSTX+

ꞏ114ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

ꞏH62ꞏ CFast.

To help increase storage space, Fagor Automation lists several CFast cards in its catalog; when using
a third-party CFast, always use an industrial grade CFast SLC as these support temperatures from
between -40ºC and +85ºC (-40 ºF and 185 ºF) and can last five years with constant day-to-day writing.
Fagor Automation shall not be held responsible for any problems caused by using lower-quality CFast
cards.

Additional storage space for user programs.

5.

CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF


Hardware functionality (connectors).
ꞏH66ꞏ DVI-D video output.
DVI-D video output. Maximun resolution of 1920×1200.

Pin. Señal.
1 TMDS 2- Red- (Link 1).
2 TMDS 2+ Red+ (Link 1).
3 TMDS 2/4 SHIELD
4 TMDS 4- Green- (Link 2).
5 TMDS 4+ Green+ (Link 2).
6 DDC clock.
7 DDC data.
8 Not used.
9 TMDS 1- Green- (Link 1).
10 TMDS 1+ Green+ (Link 1).
11 TMDS 1/3 SHIELD.
12 TMDS 3- Blue- (Link 2).
13 TMDS 3+ Blue+ (Link 2).
14 +5 V DC.
15 GND.
16 Hot plug detection.
17 TMDS 0- Blue- (Link 1) and digital synchronization.
18 TMDS 0+ Blue+ (Link 1) and digital synchronization.
19 TMDS 0/5 SHIELD
20 TMDS 5- Red- (Link 2).
21 TMDS 5+ Red+ (Link 2).
22 TMDS clock protection.
23 TMDS clock+ (Links 1 and 2).
24 TMDS clock- (Links 1 y 2).

Pin. Señal.
C1 Not being used.
C2 Not being used.
C3 Not being used.
C4 Not being used. CNCelite
C5 Not being used.
8058 8060
See "5.9.3 Connecting the DVI-D video output." on page 124.
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ115ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

ꞏI23ꞏ Local digital inputs (16 inputs).

Always make one of the following connections.


• Conductors with a cross-section of 0.5 mm², use 10 mm long sleeveless tip. Maximum length of
the stripped end, 8 mm.
• Conductors with a cross-section of 0.34 mm², use 14.5 mm long sleeved tip. Length of ferrule, 10
mm. Maximum length of the stripped end, 12 mm.

The digital inputs do not need 24 V DC power. The power pin for this connector is joined internally to
i the I24 connector to power the digital outputs. It is not necessary to power both connectors.

5.
CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF
Hardware functionality (connectors).

Left connector. Right connector.


Pin 1 coded. Pin 9 coded.

Plug-in part. Two coded connectors. 9-pole Phoenix-contact


minicombicon connector (2.5 mm pitch).
• Left connector. Pin 1 coded.

Pin. Signal. Function.


1 24 V 24 V DC voltage supply.
2-9 LI1 - LI8 Local digital inputs.
• Right connector. Pin 9 coded.

Pin. Signal. Function.


1 GND 0 V reference signal.
2- 9 LI9 - LI16 Local digital inputs.
• Both connectors.

Connector data.
Number of poles. 9.
Pitch. 2.5 mm.
Connection technique. Spring connection.
Minimum/maximum section. 0.34 / 0.5 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 22 / 20.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped.
(ferrule with/without sleeve). 12 mm / 8 mm.

See "5.8.1 Digital inputs." on page 120.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ116ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

ꞏI24ꞏ Local digital outputs (8 outputs).

RAlways make one of the following connections.


• Conductors with a cross-section of 0.5 mm², use 10 mm long sleeveless tip. Maximum length of
the stripped end, 8 mm.
• Conductors with a cross-section of 0.34 mm², use 14.5 mm long sleeved tip. Length of ferrule, 10
mm. Maximum length of the stripped end, 12 mm.

The PWM and synchronized switching options can only use pin 2 (LO1) and pin 3 (LO2) on the left
connector.

i
The digital outputs can also be powered from the I23 connector (digital inputs). The power pins on both
connectors are joined internally. It is not necessary to power both connectors.
5.

CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF


Hardware functionality (connectors).
Left connector. Right connector.
Pin 1 coded. Pin 6 coded.

Plug-in part. Two coded connectors. 6-pole Phoenix-contact


minicombicon connector (2.5 mm pitch).
• Left connector. Pin 1 coded.

Pin. Signal. Function.


1 24 V 24 V DC voltage supply.
2-3 LO1 - LO2 Local digital outputs. In the laser model, use
these pins for PWM and synchronous
switching.
4-5 LO3 - LO4 Local digital outputs.
6 GND 0 V reference signal.
• Right connector. Pin 6 coded.

Pin. Signal. Function.


1 24 V 24 V DC voltage supply.
2- 5 LO5 - LO8 Local digital outputs.
6 GND 0 V reference signal.
• Both connectors.

Connector data.
Number of poles. 6.
Pitch. 2.5 mm.
Connection technique. Spring connection.
Minimum/maximum section. 0.34 / 0.5 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 22 / 20.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped.
(ferrule with/without sleeve). 12 mm / 8 mm.
CNCelite
See "5.8.2 Digital outputs." on page 120.
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ117ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

ꞏI25ꞏ Probe input.


Plug-in part. 8-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm
pitch).

Pin. Signal. Description.


1 GND_5V 0 V reference signal for 5V.
2 +5 V 5 V output.
3 PRB1_IN5V 5 V input of probe 1.
4 PRB2_IN5V 5 V input of probe 2.
5 PRB1_IN24V 24 V input of probe 1.

5. 6
7
8
PRB2_IN24V
GND_24V
Chassis
24 V input of probe 2.
0 V reference signal for 24 V.
Shield.
CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF
Hardware functionality (connectors).

Connector data.
Number of poles. 5.
Pitch. 3.5 mm.
Connection technique. Screw connection.
Minimum/maximum tightening torque. 0.2 Nm.
Minimum/maximum section. 0.5 / 1.5 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 28 / 16.
Rated current In. 8 A.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped. 7 mm.

See "5.9.6 Probe connection." on page 126.

ꞏI26ꞏ General purpose ±10 V analog output (16 bits).


Plug-in part. 3-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm
pitch).

Pin Signal. Function.


1 GND 0 V reference signal.
2 AO Analog output.
3 SH Shield.

Connector data.
Number of poles. 3.
Pitch. 3.5 mm.
Connection technique. Screw connection.
Minimum/maximum tightening torque. 0.22 / 0.25 Nm.
Minimum/maximum section. 0.14 / 1.5 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 28 / 16.
Rated current In. 8 A.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped. 7 mm.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ118ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

ꞏX27ꞏ Relay for the emergency chain.


Plug-in part. 2-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm
pitch).

Pin. Signal. Function.


1 RELAY Relay for the emergency chain.
2 RELAY Relay for the emergency chain.

Connector data.
Number of poles. 2.

5.
Pitch. 3.5 mm.
Connection technique. Spring connection.
Minimum/maximum section. 0.2 / 1 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 24 / 16.

CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF


Hardware functionality (connectors).
Rated current In. 8 A.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped. 10 mm.

See "5.9.4 Connecting the relay for the emergency chain." on page
124.

ꞏI65ꞏ UPS control.


Plug-in part. 3-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm
pitch).

Pin Signal. Function.


1 DISABLE_BAT Potential-free relay.
2 DISABLE_BAT Potential-free relay.
3 BAT_MODE UPS status.

Connector data.
Number of poles. 3.
Pitch. 3.5 mm.
Connection technique. Spring connection.
Minimum/maximum section. 0.2 / 1 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 24 / 16.
Rated current In. 8 A.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped. 10 mm.

See chapter "15 CNC-FPS.".

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ119ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

5.8 Technical/electrical characteristics of the inputs and outputs.

5.8.1 Digital inputs.

All digital inputs are galvanically isolated up to 500 V through opto-couplers. All digital inputs
meet the standard IEC61131-2 type 1 and type 3.

Characteristic. Value.

Nominal voltage. +24 V DC (between +18 V DC and +30 V DC).

5. Activation level. From +11 V DC on and between 2.1 mA and 2.6


mA.
CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF
Technical/electrical characteristics of the inputs and outputs.

Deactivation level. Under +10 V DC or 1.5 mA.

5.8.2 Digital outputs.

For the PWM and synchronized switching, only pins LO1 or LO2 may be used.

All digital outputs are galvanically isolated up to 500 V through opto-couplers. All the digital
outputs have the following characteristics:

Characteristic. Value.
Nominal voltage. +24 V DC (between +18 V DC and +30 V DC).

Output voltage. 2 V less than the supply voltage.

Maximum output current. 500 mA per output.


Minimum cycle on. Pins LO1 LO2: 25 µs.
Rest of pins: 75 µs.

5.8.3 Analog outputs.

Use shielded cables connecting their meshes to the corresponding shield pin. All the analog
outputs have the following characteristics:

Characteristic. Value.

Command voltage within range. ±10 V.

Resolution. 16 bits.

Minimum impedance of the connected device. 10 k.

Maximum cable length (unshielded). 75 mm.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ120ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

5.8.4 Feedback inputs.

The central unit has one feedback input. The feedback signals may be incremental (TTL,
differential TTL, Vpp) or communication protocols (SSI, FeeDat, EnDat, BiSS).

Characteristic. Value.

+5 V power consumption. 250 mA.

Work levels for TTL signal.

5.
A

CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF


Technical/electrical characteristics of the inputs and outputs.
B

Io

Characteristic. Value.

Maximum frequency: 100 kHz.

Phase difference: 90º ± 20º.

High threshold (logic level "1") VIH: 2,2 V < VIH < 5 V.

Low threshold (logic level "0") VIL: -1 V < VIL < 0,6 V.

Maximum voltage: -1 V ÷ 7 V

Hysteresis: 1.2 V.

Work levels for differential TTL signal.

Io

Io

Characteristic. Value.

Maximum frequency: 1000 kHz.

Phase difference: 90º ± 20º.

Maximum voltage in common mode: -1 V ÷ 7 V

Maximum voltage in differential mode: ± 6 V.


CNCelite
Hysteresis: 0.2 V.
8058 8060
Maximum differential input current: 50 mA.
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ121ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

Work levels for sinusoidal 1 Vpp signal.

V1 VApp
A
V2

VBpp
B

5.
CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF
Technical/electrical characteristics of the inputs and outputs.

Io VIopp

Characteristic. Value.

Maximum frequency: 500 kHz.

A and B signals. Amplitude: 0.6 ÷ 1.2 Vpp

A and B signals. Centered: |V1-V2| / 2 Vpp =< 6,5%


A and B signals. Ratio: VApp / VBpp = 0.8 ÷ 1.25

A and B signals. Phase shift: 90º ± 10º

I0 signal. Amplitude: 0.2 ÷ 0.85 V


I0 signal. Width: T-90º =< I0 =< T+180º

Work levels for SSI signal.

Clock sequ ence

t1 T t2

1 2 3 n-1 n

M SB LSB

Characteristic. Value.

Transmission: SSI synchronous serial transfer via RS 485.

Levels: EIA RS 485

Clock frequency: 100 kHz - 500 kHz

Maximum number of bits (n): 32 (configurable).

T: 1 µs to 10 µs

t1: > 1 µs

t2: 20 µs to 35 µs

SSI: Gray or binary (configurable).

Parity: Fully configurable.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ122ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

5.9 Connections.

Do not handle the connectors while the CNC is turned on (inputs/outputs, feedback, etc.). Make sure
that the device is not powered before handling the connectors.

Do not make any connections while the CNC is powered. Disconnect the power before making a
connection.

5.9.1 Ground connection.


5.

CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF


Connections.
It is up to the system integrator to meet all the requirements of local and national electrical codes as
well as all the regulations applicable regarding the grounding of the whole unit.

Connect the CNC ground terminal to the main ground terminal so that the EMC performs
properly. Before connecting the inputs and outputs, make sure that the ground connection
has been made.

Ground.

5.9.2 Connecting the USB2.0 port.

• Do not run part programs from a USB device, whether it be when using a pendrive or external hard
drive. Fagor Automation recommends using the USB port only to exchanging data, such for
programs, reports, etc. If you require more storage space, then use a CFast disk.
• DO NOT connect any kind of hub to the USB port.

USB support for pen drives, hard drives, keyboards and mice; check with Fagor Automation
before connecting any other device.

Characteristics of the USB 2.0 cable.


Characteristic. Description.

Type. 28AWG/1P + 24AWG/2C construction cables with dual shielding


and ferrite cores on both ends. Recommended reference; CNC Tech
102-1030-BL-F0500.
CNCelite
8058 8060
Maximum length. 5 meters (16.40 ft).
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ123ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

5.9.3 Connecting the DVI-D video output.

Digital video output, with a maximum resolution of 1920×1200.

Characteristics of the DVI-D cable.

Characteristic. Description.

5.
Type. Single link cable (18+1) or dual link cable (24+1) with triple shielding
and ferrite cores on both ends. Recommended reference; Digitus
AK-320101-050.

Maximum length. 5 meters (16.40 ft).


CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF
Connections.

5.9.4 Connecting the relay for the emergency chain.

Single-contact relay, normally open contact that closes when the CNC is powered up and
running properly; it opens again when the CNC is turned off or when an internal failure occurs.
The relay withstands up to 1 A at 24 V.

Connector pinout.
Plug-in part. 2-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm pitch).
Pin. Signal. Function.
1 RELAY Relay for the emergency chain.
2 RELAY Relay for the emergency chain.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ124ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

5.9.5 Feedback connection.

The central unit has one feedback input. The feedback signals may be incremental (TTL,
differential TTL, Vpp) or communication protocols (SSI, FeeDat, EnDat, BiSS).

Connector pinout.
Plug-in part. 15-pin male SUB-D HD type connector.
Pin. Incremental signal.
TTL.
Differential TTL.
Protocol.
SSI.
EnDat.
5.

CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF


Connections.
1 Vpp sinusoidal. BiSS.
1 A A
2 /A /A
3 B B
4 /B /B
5 I0 DATA
6 /I0 /DATA
7 AL CLOCK
8 /AL /CLOCK
9 +5 V DC +5 V DC
10 +5 V DC +5 V DC
11 GND GND
12 GND GND
13 --- ---
14 --- ---
15 --- ---
Connect the cable shield to the connector housing at both ends.

Cable characteristics.

Fagor Automation offers a wide range of cables and extension cables to connect the feedback systems
to the CNC. The cable characteristics , as well as its length, depend on the type of feedback being
used. Refer to our catalog for further information.

We recommend to run the feedback cables as far away as possible from the power cables
of the machine.

The cable being used must have overall shield. The cable shield must be connected to the
metallic hood at each end. The unshielded portion of the wires of an unshielded cable cannot
be longer than 75 mm.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ125ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

5.9.6 Probe connection.

Connector pinout.
Plug-in part. 8-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm pitch).
Pin. Signal. Description.
1 GND_5V 0 V reference signal for 5V.
2 +5 V 5 V output.

5. 3
4
5
PRB1_IN5V
PRB2_IN5V
PRB1_IN24V
5 V input of probe 1.
5 V input of probe 2.
24 V input of probe 1.
CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF
Connections.

6 PRB2_IN24V 24 V input of probe 2.


7 GND_24V 0 V reference signal for 24 V.
8 Chassis Shield.

The CNC offers two 5 V probe inputs and two 24 V probe inputs. The following diagram
shows the first probe input (pins 1, 2 and 3 for 5 V or pins 5 and 7 for 24 V); for the second
input, it shows pins 1, 2, 4 for 5 V or pins 6 and 7 for 24 V. Pin 8 is used in all diagrams.

All the shields of the cables must be connected to ground only a the CNC through pin ꞏ8ꞏ
of the connector, leaving the other one free. The wires of the shielded cable must not be
longer than 75 mm without the protection shield.

Probe connection.

Probe whose output has a normally open contact. Connection to +5 V.

The connection acts upon the up flank (positive pulse) of the probe signal.

Probe whose output has a normally open contact. Connection to +24 V.


The connection acts upon the up flank (positive pulse) of the probe signal.

Probe whose output has a normally closed contact. Connection to +5 V.


The connection acts upon the up flank (positive pulse) of the probe signal.
CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ126ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

Probe whose output has a normally closed contact. Connection to +24 V.

The connection acts upon the up flank (positive pulse) of the probe signal.

5.

CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF


Connections.
Interface with an open-collector output. Connection to +5 V.

The connection acts upon the down flank (negative pulse) of the probe signal.

Interface with an open-collector output. Connection to +24 V.

The connection acts upon the down flank (negative pulse) of the probe signal.

Interface with a PUSH-PULL output. Connection to +5 V.


Depending on the interface being used, the connection acts upon the up flank or down flank
of the probe signal.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ127ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

Interface with a PUSH-PULL output. Connection to +24 V.

Depending on the interface being used, the connection acts upon the up flank or down flank
of the probe signal.

5.
CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF
Connections.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ128ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

5.9.7 Connection to an Ethernet network.

The Ethernet connection enables the CNC to be configured as another node in the local
network, thus being able to communicate with other CNCs or PCs to transfer files, run
telediagnoses, etc. The Ethernet connection also enables direct connection (point to point
connection) to another CNC or PC.

Connector.
The RJ45 port has two LEDs to indicate whether the CNC is connected to the network (green
LED) and if data are being transmitted (yellow LED).
5.

CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF


Connections.
LED. Meaning.
A (green) Connection LED. The LED turns on when the CNC
is connected to the data network.
B (yellow) Activity LED. The LED blinks when data is being
received/transferred.
A B

Cable characteristics.
Use a specific Ethernet cable with the following characteristics.

Characteristic. Description.

Type. 10/100 MHz connection Cat.5 (100  - 120 ) or greater.


1000 MHz connection Cat.5e (100  - 120 ) or greater.
Use a crossed cable to connect for the point to point connection to
the CNC.

Maximum length. 100 meters (328 ft).

Transmission speed.
The CNC permits a connection at 10, 100 or 1000 MHz; by default, it is configured for a
connection at 10 MHz. Use a cable having the recommended characteristics to ensure a
transmission at 100 MHz or 1000 MHz. Even so, since the transmission speed depends on
the configuration of the network (number of nodes, their configuration, etc.) a 100 MHz or
1000 MHz transmission might not be stable. In these cases, we recommend to lower the
transmission speed.

Element connection.
In order to ensure proper performance, the connection cable must be inserted all the way
into the connectors so they're latched. This ensures that the cable is properly latched and
does not come off due to vibration.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ129ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

5.9.8 EtherCAT bus.

To connect third-party modules on the bus, first acquire the software option “SOFT THIRD PARTY IOs”.
i
EtherCAT is an Ethernet-based communication protocol for connecting the CNC to remote
I/Os profile modules (proprietary or third-party). EtherCAT is configured as an inline topology,
where the CNC is the master and the other resources are distributed by nodes (up to 32).
The bus master interprets the ENI (EtherCAT Network Information) files generated by a

5.
configurator and initializes the slaves connected to the bus.

This bus is compatible with the CAN bus, responsible for the management of keyboards and
operator panels. The CNC may have remote I/Os on both buses simultaneously
CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF
Connections.

(CAN/EtherCAT), provided that both buses are not using the same resources.

Bus EtherCAT with CNC (master), RIOW-E Inline and BCSD nodes.

Node 2
Master

Node 1
Node n

B64
X1(IN) X2(OUT) CN3 CN4
EtherCAT bus

Resources available on the bus.


Resources of the bus. Total in the bus.

Digital inputs. 1024

Digital outputs. 1024

General purpose analog inputs. 40

General purpose analog outputs. 40

Analog inputs for Pt100 temperature sensors. 10


Drives (BCSD and third party). 32

Connector.
RJ45 connectors for 4-wire cable.

Pin. Signal.
1 TD +
2 TD -
3 RD +
4 ---
5 ---
6 RD -
7 ---
CNCelite 8 ---
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ130ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

Cable characteristics.

Use a specific EtherCAT cable. EtherCAT cables should never be installed next to power cables and
they should never cross over each other at a 90 degree angle.

Fagor Automation supplies the required cables for EtherCAT communication; when using
third-party cables, these must be of the same category as those supplied by Fagor (see
tables). There are different types of cables depending on length and dynamic and static
installation characteristics.

ECAT-CABLE cable

Type. Industrial Cat 6A shielded 8-wire Ethernet cable (twisted pairs).


5.

CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF


Connections.
Diameter. 6.3 mm - 6.9 mm.

Flexibility. Minimum static bending radius 4 x diameter.


Minimum dynamic bending radius 8 x diameter.

Covering. PVC. Polyvinyl chloride.

Temperature. Work: -20 ºC / 80 ºC (-4 ºF / 176 ºF).


Storage: -20 ºC / 80 ºC (-4 ºF / 176 ºF).

Color. Yellow, RAL 1021.


Minimum/maximum length. 1 m (3.2 ft) / 7 m (23 ft).

ECAT-CABLE-FLEX cable

Type. Industrial Cat 6A shielded 8-wire Ethernet cable (twisted pairs).


Diameter. 6.3 mm - 6.9 mm.

Flexibility. Minimum static bending radius 4 x diameter.


Minimum dynamic bending radius 8 x diameter.

Covering. PUR. Polyurethane.

Temperature. Work: -40 ºC / 80 ºC (-40 ºF / 176 ºF).


Storage: -40 ºC / 80 ºC (-40 ºF / 176 ºF).

Color. Yellow, RAL 1021.


Minimum/maximum length. 10 m (32.8 ft) / 100 m (328 ft).

Bus configuration.

Refer to the installation manual for further information on installing and using the EtherCAT configurator
and mapper.

Element connection.

Use an inline topology. Join the B64 connector of the CNC to the X1(IN) connector of the
first header. Connect the other of headers, joining the X2 (OUT) connector of one header
with the X1 (IN) connector of the following one. Do not connect the X2(OUT) connector of
the last header.

In order to ensure proper performance, the connection cable must be inserted all the way
into the connectors so they're latched. This ensures that the cable is properly latched and
does not come off due to vibration.

Module identification.
CNCelite
The node number for each header is not defined on this bus. The node number is assigned 8058 8060
by the configurator on the basis of its designed topology.
8065 8070
Transmission speed.

The transmission speed is 100 MHz. Use a cable having the recommended characteristics REF: 2305
to ensure this speed.

Activate the bus on the CNC.

Activate the bus on the CNC using the machine parameter ETHERCATBUS.

ꞏ131ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

Configuring the EtherCAT bus.

Fagor supplies the configurator “KPA EtherCAT Studio” (by Koening-pa GmbH) under
license, which can operate both online and offline, to define the bus topology and create the
ENI file containing the bus device information. This file must be copied to the folder
../Mtb/Data of the CNC with the name "fagor_ethercatConfFile.xml". This file also uses the
"Fagor EtherCAT Mapper" program for determining the resources available in the bus.

Mapping the bus resources.

5.
The mapping consists of allocating among the available resources in the bus and the PLC
resources (inputs, outputs or registers). The digital inputs and outputs are mapped to
resources of the same type in the PLC. Analog inputs and outputs are mapped to PLC
registers.
CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF
Connections.

Fagor has the "Fagor EtherCAT Mapper" program to carry out the mapping. From the ENI
file generated by the EtherCAT configurator, this program makes a mapping proposal. The
user can accept this proposal or perform the necessary modifications, all in a way that helps
ensure there are no duplicated resources. Once the mapping is completed, this software
creates a file with the description of the routing. This file must be copied to the folder
../Mtb/Data of the CNC with the name "resourceRouterConf.xml".

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ132ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

5.9.9 Bus Sercos-III.

To connect third-party modules on the bus, first acquire the software option “SOFT THIRD PARTY IOs”.
i
Sercos III is an Ethernet-based communication protocol (IEEE 802.3 and ISO / IEC 8802-
3 compliant), which connects the CNC to the drives. Sercos III is configured as an inline
topology, where the CNC is the master and the other resources are distributed by nodes (up
to 32).

Sercos III bus with CNC (master) and QC-DR drives.


Máster
Node 1 Node 2
5.

CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF


Connections.
Node n

B10 B10B B10A B10B B10A


Sercos III bus.

Connector.
RJ45 connector for 4-wire cable.

Pin. Signal.
1 TD +
2 TD -
3 RD +
4 ---
5 ---
6 RD -
7 ---
8 ---

Cable characteristics.

Use a cable specifically for Sercos III.

Fagor Automation supplies the required cables for Sercos III communication; when using
third-party cables, these must be of the same category as those supplied by Fagor (see
tables). There are different types of cables depending on length and dynamic and static
installation characteristics.

QC-FBC cable

Type. Industrial Cat 5A Sercos III shielded 4-wire cable (twisted pairs).
Suitable for flexible assemblies.

Diameter. 6.3 mm - 6.7 mm.

Flexibility. Minimum static bending radius 3 x diameter. CNCelite


Minimum dynamic bending radius 5 x diameter.
Torsional strength: ±180º over 1 meter, 30,000 cycles.
8058 8060
8065 8070
Covering. PVC. Polyvinyl chloride.

Temperature. Fixed operation: -40 ºC / 70 ºC (-40 ºF / 158 ºF).


Flexible operation: -20 ºC / 60 ºC (-4 ºF / 140 ºF). REF: 2305

Color. Green, RAL 6018.

Minimum/maximum length. 1 m (3.2 ft) / 7 m (23 ft).

ꞏ133ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

QC-FBC-FLEX cable

Type. Industrial Cat 5C Sercos III shielded 4-wire cable (twisted pairs).
Suitable for flexible assemblies, especially cable carrying chains.

Diameter. 6.3 mm - 6.7 mm.

Flexibility. Minimum static bending radius 3 x diameter.


Minimum dynamic bending radius 7 x diameter.
Torsional strength: ±180º over 1 meter, 30,000 cycles.

Covering. PUR. Polyurethane.

5. Temperature. Fixed operation: -40 ºC / 70 ºC (-40 ºF / 158 ºF).


Flexible operation: -20 ºC / 60 ºC (-4 ºF / 140 ºF).
CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF
Connections.

Color. Green, RAL 6018.

Minimum/maximum length. 10 m (32.8 ft) / 100 m (328 ft).

Bus configuration.

Element connection.

Use an inline topology. Join the B10 connector of the CNC to the B10B connector of the first
drive. Connect the drives together by joining the B10A connector of one drive to the B10B
connector of the other drive. The B10A connector of the last drive is not connected.

In order to ensure proper performance, the connection cable must be inserted all the way
into the connectors so they're latched. This ensures that the cable is properly latched and
does not come off due to vibration.

Module identification.

The node number for each drive is not defined on this bus. The CNC identifies the drives
according to the order in which they are connected.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ134ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

5.9.10 CAN bus.

CANopen is a network communication protocol based on the CAN bus system for connecting
the CNC with remote modules and keyboards. The CAN connection supports up to 32
devices (nodes), including the central unit; more one than keyboard and several groups of
remote modules are possible.

Bus CAN with CNC (master) and RIOR nodes.

5.
Master
Node 1 Node 2 Node n

CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF


Connections.
B28 B28A B28B B28A B28B
CAN bus.

CAN connector.
Plug-in part. 5-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm
pitch).

Pin. Signal. Function.


1 GND Ground / 0 V.
2 CL (LOW) bus signal.
3 SH CAN shield.
4 CH (HIGH) bus signal.
5 SH Not being used.

The cable shield must be connected to the connector at both ends. The connector has two
shield pins. Both pins are equivalent; the CAN shield may be connected to either one.

Characteristics of the CAN cable.


Use a specific CAN cable. The ends of all the wires and the shield must be protected by the
corresponding terminal (pin). Also use the terminals (pins) to secure the cable to the
connector.

Characteristic. Description.

Type. Shielded. Twisted pair (1 x 2 x 0.22 mm²).


Flexibility. Extremely flexible. Minimum bending radius, static = 50 mm and
dynamic = 95 mm.

Cover. PUR

Impedance. Cat.5 (100 - 120 )

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ135ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

Interconnection of modules.
Respect the cable's minimum bending radius when connecting it. They must be connected
in series; on elements having two CAN connectors, either one may be used. Once the
elements have been connected, define their logic order in the bus and the transmission
speed.

Remote modules of the RIOR and RIO5 series.

5. CNC

ADDRESS = 0
BCD
JOG PANEL

ADDRESS = 3
B CD
MODULE 1

ADDRESS = 1
BCD
MODULE 2

ADDRESS = 2
BCD

F0 1

F0 1

F0 1

F0 1
78 9

78 9

78 9

78 9
3 45 34 5 34 5 34 5
CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF
Connections.

ADD MSB = 0 ADD MSB = 0


Line Term = 1 Line Term = 0 Line Term = 0 Line Term = 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

X2 X2 X2
ISO GND ISO GND ISO GND ISO GND
CAN L CAN L CAN L CAN L
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD
CAN H CAN H CAN H CAN H
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD

X3 X3 X3
ISO GND ISO GND ISO GND
CAN L CAN L CAN L
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD
CAN H CAN H CAN H
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD

The drawing shows the CAN connection between the CPU (central unit), the
operator panel and 2 groups of RIOR or RIO5 series remote modules.

RIOW series remote modules.

CNC JOG PANEL MODULE 1 MODULE 2

BCD B CD
4 4
ADDRESS = 0 ADDRESS = 3 3 ADDRESS = 1 3 ADDRESS = 2
F0 1

F0 1
78 9

78 9

3 45 34 5
2 2
1 1
ON ON
Line Term = 1 Line Term = 0
0 1 0 1

X2
ISO GND ISO GND
CAN L CAN L
SHIELD SHIELD
CAN H CAN H
SHIELD SHIELD

X3
ISO GND ISO GND
CAN L CAN L
SHIELD SHIELD
CAN H CAN H
SHIELD SHIELD

The drawing shows the CAN connection between the CPU (central unit), the
CNCelite operator panel and 2 groups of RIOW series remote modules.
8058 8060
8065 8070
Module identification at the bus.
REF: 2305
Each one of the elements integrated into the CAN bus is identified by its address or node
number. The CNC must always occupy position "0" and the rest of the elements of the bus
will occupy consecutive positions starting with 1.

ꞏ136ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

Identification of the first and last elements of the bus. Line


terminating resistor.
In the CAN bus, it is necessary to use a line terminating resistor to identify which are the
elements that occupy the ends of the bus; i.e. the first and last physical element in the
connection. For the central unit, the terminating resistor is factory installed because the CNC
is always at one end of the bus.

Selecting the speed for the CANopen bus.


When using the CANopen protocol, the transmission speed at the bus is defined in each node
5.
and they all must run at the same speed. The transmission speed depends on the total length

CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF


Connections.
of the bus. Using the following illustrative values; assigning other values may cause
communication errors due to signal distortion.

Speed Length of the CAN bus.

1000 kHz Up to 20 meters.

800 kHz From 20 to 40 meters.

500 kHz From 40 to 100 meters.

250 kHz From 100 to 500 meters.


The speed of 250 kHz is only available to communicate with the keyboards and
RIOW and RIOR series remote modules; this speed is not available for the RIO5
series remote modules.

Selecting the speed at the CNC.

At the CNC, the transmission speed is selected by means of the machine parameters
(parameter CANOPENFREQ).

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ137ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

5.
CENTRAL UNIT (IN-CABINET MODEL WITH POSSIBILITY OF
Connections.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ138ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

1 MONITOR-18 MULTITOUCH.

Monitor to display the VDI-D video signal from the central unit and also to serve as the touch
screen, permitting interaction with the central unit.

Module. Description.

MONITOR-18W MULTITOUCH 18.5" (1366 × 768) monitor, aspect ratio 16:9, 24-
bit color, Multi-touch.

6.

MONITOR-18 MULTITOUCH.
.5"
18

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ139ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

1.1 Specifications.

Type. Description.

General. • 18.5" (1366 × 768) monitor, multi-touch screen (10 points) and USB driver.
• Dimensions (width x height x depth).
- 488 × 309 × 47.70 mm.
- 19.21" × 12.17" × 1.88".
• Weight: 6 kg (13.2 lb)

6.
• Compatible with the VESA mount standard.
• OSD (On Screen Display) menu; rear buttons.

Regulation. • BSMI, CE, FCC Class A, CCC, UL.


MONITOR-18 MULTITOUCH.
Specifications.

Ambient. • Storage temperature: Between -20 and 60 °C (-4 and 140 °F).
• Working temperature: Between 0 and 55 °C (32 and 101 °F).
• Relative humidity: Between 10 and 90 % (non condensing).
• Vibration: Between 5 and 500 Hz, 1 Grms (in operation, random).
• Degree of protection: Front complies with standard IP66.

Power supply. • Power (use one of the following options).


- 24 V DC via Phoenix-type connector (recommended).
- 12 V DC via DC jack connector (consult Fagor Automation).
• Maximum consumption: 20 W + 20%.

LCD. • Type: TFT LED LCD WXGA.


• Screen: 10-point multi-touch capacitive.
• Size: 18.5" (aspect ratio 16:9).
• Screen color: 24 bits (16.7 million colors).
• Resolution: 1920 × 1080.
• Angle of vision: 178° (vertical), 178° (horizontal).
• Brightness: 300 cd/m².
• Contrast ratio: 1000:1 (typical).
• Lamp duration (MTBF): 50,000 hours.

Connectivity. • Touch controller.


- USB (recommended).
- RS-232 (consult Fagor Automation).
• Video input.
- VGA
- DVI-D.

Touch controller.
Fagor Automation recommends using the USB driver for the touch screen. Consult Fagor Automation
before using the RS232 driver.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ140ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

1.2 General diagram.

CNC MONITOR-18 MULTITOUCH

DVI-D

T/S-USB
6.

MONITOR-18 MULTITOUCH.
General diagram.
Connection. Description.

DVI-D DVI-D video signal input.


Maximum length; 5 m (16.40 feet) (*).

T/S USB Touch screen driver (recommended).


Maximum length; 5 m (16.40 feet).

(*) For lengths greater than 5 meters, use a PPC-21W or PPC-19.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ141ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

1.3 Dimensions.

d a

6. Db b
MONITOR-18 MULTITOUCH.
Dimensions.

Da

mm inch mm inch
a 488 19.21 Da 476.30 18.75

b 309 12.17 Db 297.30 11.70

c 40.70 1.60

d 47.70 1.88

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ142ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

1.4 Enclosure and mounting of the module.

1.4.1 Enclosure design.

The enclosure must meet the following requirements:


• The degree of protection of the enclosure must be IP54, according to standard IEC
60529.
• Keep the enclosure clean.
• The dissipation surface of the enclosure must be enough to evacuate (by convection)
the heat generated inside. 6.
• In the connector area, reserve a space that allows the cables to be connected, respecting

MONITOR-18 MULTITOUCH.
Enclosure and mounting of the module.
their radius of curvature.
• Respect the minimum distances recommended between the enclosure walls and the
hardware to let the air flow and improve heat dissipation.

To meet the previous requirements, Fagor recommends the following.


i • The enclosure must not have any ventilation holes, because they could let dust or other substances
in.

Before building an enclosure with glass fiber u another poor heat dissipating material, contact Fagor
i Automation.

Dimensions of the cut off part and the enclosure.

Radius of the corners = 5 mm (0.2 inches).


D

mm inch mm inch

W 479,30±1,0 18,87±0,040 D (*) 75 2.95

H 300,30±0,7 11,82±0,025 (*) Minimum recommended distance.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ143ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

1.4.2 Securing the module.

The module must be installed in a proper enclosure that may be located on the machine or
on an external support. To insert the unit into the enclosure, it must have a big enough hole
to allow to insert it easily, without obstacles and without forcing the unit. See "1.4.1 Enclosure
design." on page 143.

The module is mounted from inside the enclosure. Once the unit has been inserted into the
enclosure, secure it from the inside with the tension jacks. To properly secure it, use all the
tension jacks on the back of the unit. Apply a tightening torque of 0.7 Nm.

6. 1 Use the two top screws (A) to fasten the pressure hooks (B).

B
MONITOR-18 MULTITOUCH.
Enclosure and mounting of the module.

2 Use the two bottom stop screws (C).

3 Rest the monitor on the stop screws inside the hole and push the top part until the
pressure hooks hold the monitor.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ144ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

4 Fasten the monitor on the rear, using all the fastening hooks (D).

6.

MONITOR-18 MULTITOUCH.
Enclosure and mounting of the module.
1 2

0.7 Nm

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ145ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

1.5 Voltage supply for the module.

The monitor has two power supply connections. Fagor Automation recommends using 24 V
DC (Phoenix-type connector) to power the monitor. Consult Fagor Automation before using
the 12 V DC option.

Never connect both power systems at the same time.

6. 24 V DC universal power supply.


Option recommended by Fagor Automation to power the monitor. Power the monitor with
MONITOR-18 MULTITOUCH.
Voltage supply for the module.

a 24 V DC ±10% 1.5 A power supply.

Pin Signal. Function.


1 - - -.

2 GND 0 V reference signal.


3 +24 V Power supply.

Power supply cable characteristics.

Use generic 12 AWG (4 mm²) to 18 AWG (1 mm²) cable.

Consumption.
Maximum consumption: 20 W +20 %.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ146ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

1.6 Configuring the video signal from the monitor.

The buttons to configure the monitor are on the back.

Button Description.
.

Turns the monitor on and off.


Power

Auto/Exit
Automatically adjusts the clock, phase, horizontal
position and vertical position. 6.

MONITOR-18 MULTITOUCH.
Configuring the video signal from the monitor.
Increases the brightness.

Left
Reduces the brightness.

Right
Activates the OSD menu.

Menu/Sel Changes the video input source.

Source

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ147ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

1.7 Connectors.

Bottom view.

A B C D E F

6. (A) T/S RS-232


G Ground connection.

Touch screen driver (consult Fagor Automation).


(B) T/S USB Touch screen driver (recommended).
MONITOR-18 MULTITOUCH.
Connectors.

(C) 24 V DC IN 24 V DC supply input (recommended).


(D) 12 V DC IN 12 V DC supply input (consult Fagor Automation).
(E) DVI-D DVI-D video signal input.
(F) VGA VGA video signal input.
(G) Ground connection.

ꞏT/S RS232ꞏ Touch screen driver (not recommended).


Plug-in part 9-pin female SUB-D HD connector.

Pin. Signal. Function.


1 DCD Data Carrier Detect.
2 RxD Received Data.
3 TxD Transmit Data.
1 ... 5 4 DTR Data Terminal Ready.
6 ... 9 5 GND Ground.
6 DSR Data Set Ready.
7 RTS Request To Send.
8 CTS Clear To Send.
9 RI Ring Indicator.

Touch controller.
i Fagor Automation recommends using the USB driver for the touch screen. Consult Fagor Automation
before using the RS232 driver.

ꞏT/S USBꞏ Touch screen driver (recommended).

Option recommended by Fagor Automation for the touch controller.


USB type-B controller. Plug-in part.

Pin. Signal.
1 + 5 V DC.
2 Data -.
2 3 Data +.
1 4 GND.
3
4 Maximum length; 5 m (16.40 feet).

Using cables with a length longer than 5 m or extension cords can cause problems in terms of
i compliance with EMC directives; before using this type of cables in an industrial setting, check whether
the installation complies with regulations.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ148ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

ꞏ24 V DC INꞏ Supply input (recommended).

Option recommended by Fagor Automation to power the monitor.


Plug-in part 3-pole Phoenix-type connector (5.08 mm pitch).
Rated current; 16 A.
Pin Signal. Function.
1 - - -.

2 GND 0 V reference signal.

6.
1 3 +24 V Power supply.

Connector data.
Number of poles. 3.

MONITOR-18 MULTITOUCH.
Connectors.
Pitch. 5.08 mm.
Connection technique. Screw connection.
Minimum/maximum section. 0.2 / 4 mm².
Rated current In. 16 A.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped. 7 mm.

See "1.5 Voltage supply for the module." on page 146.

ꞏ12 V DC INꞏ Supply input (not recommended).


DC jack connector for the external current adapter. See
"1.5 Voltage supply for the module." on page 146.

Power supply.
i Fagor Automation recommends 24 V DC power for the monitor. Consult Fagor Automation before using
the 12 V DC option.

Power supply.
Never connect both power systems at the same time.

ꞏVGAꞏ Video input.


Plug-in part. 15-pin female SUB-D HD type connector.

Pin. Signal.
1 MAINS
2 GREEN
3 BLUE
1 ... 5 4 ---
11 ... 15 5 GND
6 GND_RED
7 GND_GREEN
8 GND_BLUE
9 ---
10 GND_SYNC
11 ---
12 --- CNCelite
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC 8058 8060
15 --- 8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ149ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

ꞏDVI-Dꞏ Video input.


Plug-in part.

Pin. Señal.
1 TMDS 2- Red- (Link 1).
2 TMDS 2+ Red+ (Link 1).
3 TMDS 2/4 SHIELD
4 TMDS 4- Green- (Link 2).
5 TMDS 4+ Green+ (Link 2).
6 DDC clock.

6. 7
8
9
DDC data.
Not used.
TMDS 1- Green- (Link 1).
10 TMDS 1+ Green+ (Link 1).
MONITOR-18 MULTITOUCH.
Connectors.

11 TMDS 1/3 SHIELD.


12 TMDS 3- Blue- (Link 2).
13 TMDS 3+ Blue+ (Link 2).
14 +5 V DC.
15 GND.
16 Hot plug detection.
17 TMDS 0- Blue- (Link 1) and digital synchronization.
18 TMDS 0+ Blue+ (Link 1) and digital synchronization.
19 TMDS 0/5 SHIELD
20 TMDS 5- Red- (Link 2).
21 TMDS 5+ Red+ (Link 2).
22 TMDS clock protection.
23 TMDS clock+ (Links 1 and 2).
24 TMDS clock- (Links 1 and 2).

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ150ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

1.8 Cable characteristics.

1.8.1 VGA video signal.

Fagor Automation supplies the necessary cable for the VGA connection. The cable is valid for static
installations such as cable carrying chains. For further information, refer to the Ordering Handbook.

Cable characteristics.
Use specific VGA cable.
6.

MONITOR-18 MULTITOUCH.
Cable characteristics.
ꞏVGAꞏ cable.

Type. Shielded.

Flexibility. Normal.

Impedance. 75.

Maximum length. 5 m (16.40 ft).

Consult Fagor Automation before using cables longer than 5 m.


i

Node connection.
Use the VGA output of the central unit. The connection is parallel, 1 with 1, 2 with 2, etc. The
cable shield must be connected to the connector at both ends.

CNC MONITOR
Housing Housing
1 1
RED RED
2 2
GREEN GREEN
3 3
BLUE BLUE
5 5
GND GND
6 6
GND_RED GND_RED
7 7
GND_GREEN GND_GREEN
8 8
GND_BLUE GND_BLUE
10 10
GND_SYNC GND_SYNC

13 13
HSYNC HSYNC
14 14
VSYNC VSYNC

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ151ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

1.8.2 DVI-D video signal.

Fagor Automation supplies the necessary cable for the DVI-D connection; when using third-party
cables, these must be of the same category as those supplied by Fagor (see table)

Characteristics of the DVI-D cable.

6.
Characteristic. Description.

Type. Single link cable (18+1) or dual link cable (24+1) with triple shielding
and ferrite cores on both ends. Recommended reference; Digitus
MONITOR-18 MULTITOUCH.
Cable characteristics.

AK-320101-050.

Maximum length. 5 meters (16.40 ft).

Consult Fagor Automation before using cables longer than 5 m.


i

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ152ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

1.9 OSD (On Screen Display) menu.

The selected values are stored in the memory of the monitor after pressing the [Menu/Sel]
button at the end of the wait time. The saved values are not lost when the monitor is turned
off. However, the selected value will not be available if the monitor is turned off before the
wait time has been completed. The wait time is approximately 5 seconds, and can be
configured from the OSD menu.

1.9.1 Using the rear keyboard with the OSD menu. 6.

MONITOR-18 MULTITOUCH.
OSD (On Screen Display) menu.
The keys on the rear of the monitor have the following functionality when the OSD menu is
active.

Button. Description.

Main OSD menu.


Turns the monitor on and off.
OSD sub-menu.
Turns the monitor on and off.

Main OSD menu.


Exits the OSD menu.
OSD sub-menu.
Returns to the previous menu.

Main OSD menu.


Moves the selector to the left.
OSD sub-menu.
Moves the selector to the left.
Moves the selector up and down.
Increases the value of the selected option.

Main OSD menu.


Moves the selector to the right.
OSD sub-menu.
Moves the selector to the right.
Moves the selector up and down.
Reduces the value of the selected option.

Main OSD menu.


Activates the OSD menu.
OSD sub-menu.
Confirms the selected option.

Main OSD menu.


Changes the video input source.
OSD sub-menu.
Not used.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ153ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

1.9.2 OSD menu.

To display the OSD menu, press the MENU key on the back of the monitor.

6.
MONITOR-18 MULTITOUCH.
OSD (On Screen Display) menu.

Icon. Description.

Video input.

Contrast/Brightness.

Geometry (for DVI input).

Temperature color.

Language.

OSD configuration.

Auto-configuration.

Information.

Restore.

Exit.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ154ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

Video input.
Select this menu icon using the [Left] and [Right] keys and press the [Menu/Sel]
key to confirm the selection.

OSD sub-menu.

6.

MONITOR-18 MULTITOUCH.
OSD (On Screen Display) menu.
Contrast/Brightness.
Select this menu icon using the [Left] and [Right] keys and press the [Menu/Sel]
key to confirm the selection.

OSD sub-menu.

Recall Value Meaning.

Recall Recalls the default values.

REC1 Recalls saved settings 1.

REC2 Recalls saved settings 2.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ155ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

Geometry (for DVI input).


Select this menu icon using the [Left] and [Right] keys and press the [Menu/Sel]
key to confirm the selection.

OSD sub-menu.

6.
MONITOR-18 MULTITOUCH.
OSD (On Screen Display) menu.

Temperature color.
Select this menu icon using the [Left] and [Right] keys and press the [Menu/Sel]
key to confirm the selection.

OSD sub-menu.

Language.
Select this menu icon using the [Left] and [Right] keys and press the [Menu/Sel]
key to confirm the selection.

OSD sub-menu.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ156ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

OSD configuration.
Select this menu icon using the [Left] and [Right] keys and press the [Menu/Sel]
key to confirm the selection.

OSD sub-menu.

6.

MONITOR-18 MULTITOUCH.
OSD (On Screen Display) menu.
Auto-configuration.
Select this menu icon using the [Left] and [Right] keys and press the [Menu/Sel]
key to confirm the selection.

OSD sub-menu.

Information.
Select this menu icon using the [Left] and [Right] keys and press the [Menu/Sel]
key to confirm the selection.

OSD sub-menu.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ157ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

Restore.
Select this menu icon using the [Left] and [Right] keys and press the [Menu/Sel]
key to confirm the selection.

OSD sub-menu.

6.
MONITOR-18 MULTITOUCH.
OSD (On Screen Display) menu.

Exit.
Select this menu icon using the [Left] and [Right] keys and press the [Menu/Sel]
key to confirm the selection.

OSD sub-menu.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ158ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

1.9.3 Locks and unlocks the OSD menu.

Locks the OSD menu.


Press the [Left]+[Right] keys and the following message will appear on
screen.

6.

MONITOR-18 MULTITOUCH.
OSD (On Screen Display) menu.
Do not release the keys until the screen indicates that the operation has
been completed.

Unlocking the OSD menu.


Press the [Left]+[Right] keys and the following message will appear on
screen.

Do not release the keys until the screen indicates that the operation has
been completed.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

Note: All images of the OSD menu are property of Advantech Co., Ltd.

ꞏ159ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

6.
MONITOR-18 MULTITOUCH.
OSD (On Screen Display) menu.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ160ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

7 MONITOR-21 MULTITOUCH.

Monitor to display the VGA or DVI-D video signal from the central unit and also to serve as
the touch screen, permitting interaction with the central unit.

Module. Description.

MONITOR-21W MULTITOUCH 21.5" (1920 × 1080) monitor, aspect ratio 16:9,


24-bit color, Multi-touch.
MONITOR-21W MULTITOUCH NEUTRO

7.

MONITOR-21 MULTITOUCH.
.5"
21

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ161ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

7.1 Specifications.

Type. Description.

General. • 21.5" (1920 × 1080) monitor, multi-touch screen (10 points) and USB driver.
• Dimensions (width x height x depth)
- 558.40 × 349.80 × 47.70 mm.
- 21.98" × 13.77" × 1.88".
• Weight: 8 kg (17.6 lb).

7.
• Compatible with the VESA mount standard.
• OSD (On Screen Display) menu; rear buttons.

Regulation. • BSMI, CE, FCC, CCC, UL.


MONITOR-21 MULTITOUCH.
Specifications.

Ambient. • Storage temperature: Between -20 and 60 °C (-4 and 140 °F).
• Working temperature: Between 0 and 55 °C (32 and 101 °F).
• Relative humidity: Between 10 and 90 % (non condensing).
• Vibration: Between 5 and 500 Hz, 1 Grms (in operation, random).
• Degree of protection: Front complies with standard IP65.

Power supply. • Power (use one of the following options).


- 24 V DC via Phoenix-type connector (recommended).
- 12 V DC via DC jack connector (consult Fagor Automation).
• Maximum consumption: 25 W.

LCD. • Type: TFT LED LCD FullHD.


• Screen: 10-point multi-touch capacitive.
• Size: 21.5" (aspect ratio 16:9).
• Screen color: 24 bits (16.7 million colors).
• Resolution: 1920 × 1080.
• Angle of vision: 178° (vertical), 178° (horizontal).
• Brightness: 300 cd/m².
• Contrast ratio: 5000:1 (typical).
• Lamp duration (MTBF): 50,000 hours.

Connectivity. • Touch controller.


- USB (recommended).
- RS-232 (consult Fagor Automation).
• Video input.
- VGA
- DVI-D

Touch controller.
Fagor Automation recommends using the USB driver for the touch screen. Consult Fagor Automation
before using the RS232 driver.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ162ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

7.2 General diagram.

Q7A platform.

CNC MONITOR-21W MULTITOUCH


MONITOR-21W MULTITOUCH NEUTRO

DVI-D

T/S USB 7.

MONITOR-21 MULTITOUCH.
General diagram.
Connection. Description.

DVI-D DVI-D video signal input.


Maximum length; 5 m (16.40 feet).

T/S USB Touch screen driver (recommended).


Maximum length; 5 m (16.40 feet).

(*) For lengths greater than 5 meters, use a PPC-21W or PPC-19.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ163ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

7.3 Dimensions.

d a

7. Db b
MONITOR-21 MULTITOUCH.
Dimensions.

Da

mm inch mm inch
a 558.40 21.98 Da 548.00 21.57

b 349.80 13.77 Db 339.25 13.36

c 40.70 1.60

d 47.70 1.88

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ164ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

7.4 Enclosure and mounting of the module.

7.4.1 Enclosure design.

The enclosure must meet the following requirements:


• The degree of protection of the enclosure must be IP54, according to standard IEC
60529.
• Keep the enclosure clean.
• The dissipation surface of the enclosure must be enough to evacuate (by convection)
the heat generated inside. 7.
• In the connector area, reserve a space that allows the cables to be connected, respecting

MONITOR-21 MULTITOUCH.
Enclosure and mounting of the module.
their radius of curvature.
• Respect the minimum distances recommended between the enclosure walls and the
hardware to let the air flow and improve heat dissipation.

To meet the previous requirements, Fagor recommends the following.


i • The enclosure must not have any ventilation holes, because they could let dust or other substances
in.

Before building an enclosure with glass fiber u another poor heat dissipating material, contact Fagor
i Automation.

Dimensions of the cut off part and the enclosure.

Radius of the corners = 5 mm (0.2 inches).


D

mm inch mm inch

W 550,30±1,0 21,67±0,040 D (*) 75 2.95

H 341,80±0,7 13,46±0,025 (*) Minimum recommended distance.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ165ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

7.4.2 Securing the module.

The module must be installed in a proper enclosure that may be located on the machine or
on an external support. To insert the unit into the enclosure, it must have a big enough hole
to allow to insert it easily, without obstacles and without forcing the unit. See "7.4.1 Enclosure
design." on page 165.

The module is mounted from inside the enclosure. Once the unit has been inserted into the
enclosure, secure it from the inside with the tension jacks. To properly secure it, use all the
tension jacks on the back of the unit. Apply a tightening torque of 0.7 Nm.

7. 1 Use the two top screws (A) to fasten the pressure hooks (B).

B
MONITOR-21 MULTITOUCH.
Enclosure and mounting of the module.

2 Use the two bottom stop screws (C).

3 Rest the monitor on the stop screws inside the hole and push the top part until the
pressure hooks hold the monitor.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ166ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

4 Fasten the monitor on the rear, using all the fastening hooks (D).

7.

MONITOR-21 MULTITOUCH.
Enclosure and mounting of the module.
1 2

0.7 Nm

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ167ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

7.5 Voltage supply for the module.

The monitor has two power supply connections. Fagor Automation recommends using 24 V
DC (Phoenix-type connector) to power the monitor. Consult Fagor Automation before using
the 12 V DC option.

Never connect both power systems at the same time.

7. 24 V DC universal power supply.


Option recommended by Fagor Automation to power the monitor. Power the monitor with
MONITOR-21 MULTITOUCH.
Voltage supply for the module.

a 24 V DC ±10% 1.5 A power supply.

Pin Signal. Function.


1 - - -.

2 GND 0 V reference signal.


3 +24 V Power supply.

Power supply cable characteristics.

Use generic 12 AWG (4 mm²) to 18 AWG (1 mm²) cable.

Consumption.
Maximum consumption: 25 W.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ168ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

7.6 Configuring the video signal from the monitor.

The buttons to configure the monitor are on the back.

Button Description.
.

Turns the monitor on and off.


Power

Auto/Exit
Automatically adjusts the clock, phase, horizontal
position and vertical position. 7.

MONITOR-21 MULTITOUCH.
Configuring the video signal from the monitor.
Increases the brightness.

Left
Reduces the brightness.

Right
Activates the OSD menu.

Menu/Sel Changes the video input source.

Source

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ169ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

7.7 Connectors.

Bottom view.

A B C D E F

7. (1)
G

T/S RS-232Touch screen driver (consult Fagor Automation).


Ground connection.

(2) T/S USBTouch screen driver (recommended).


MONITOR-21 MULTITOUCH.
Connectors.

(3) 24 V DC IN24 V DC supply input (recommended).


(4) 12 V DC IN12 V DC supply input (consult Fagor Automation).
(5) DVI-DDVI-D video signal input.
(6) VGAVGA video signal input.
(7) Ground connection.

ꞏT/S RS232ꞏ Touch screen driver (not recommended).


Plug-in part 9-pin female SUB-D HD connector.

Pin. Signal. Function.


1 DCD Data Carrier Detect.
2 RxD Received Data.
3 TxD Transmit Data.
1 ... 5 4 DTR Data Terminal Ready.
6 ... 9 5 GND Ground.
6 DSR Data Set Ready.
7 RTS Request To Send.
8 CTS Clear To Send.
9 RI Ring Indicator.

Touch controller.
i Fagor Automation recommends using the USB driver for the touch screen. Consult Fagor Automation
before using the RS232 driver.

ꞏT/S USBꞏ Touch screen driver (recommended).

Option recommended by Fagor Automation for the touch controller.


USB type-B controller. Plug-in part.

Pin. Signal.
1 + 5 V DC.
2 Data -.
2 3 Data +.
1 4 GND.
3
4 Maximum length; 5 m (16.40 feet).

Using cables with a length longer than 5 m or extension cords can cause problems in terms of
i compliance with EMC directives; before using this type of cables in an industrial setting, check whether
the installation complies with regulations.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ170ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

ꞏ24 V DC INꞏ Supply input (recommended).

Option recommended by Fagor Automation to power the monitor.


Plug-in part 3-pole Phoenix-type connector (5.08 mm pitch).
Rated current; 16 A.
Pin Signal. Function.
1 - - -.

2 GND 0 V reference signal.

7.
1 3 +24 V Power supply.

Connector data.
Number of poles. 3.

MONITOR-21 MULTITOUCH.
Connectors.
Pitch. 5.08 mm.
Connection technique. Screw connection.
Minimum/maximum section. 0.2 / 4 mm².
Rated current In. 16 A.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped. 7 mm.

See "7.5 Voltage supply for the module." on page 168.

ꞏ12 V DC INꞏ Supply input (not recommended).


DC jack connector for the external current adapter. See
"7.5 Voltage supply for the module." on page 168.

Power supply.
i Fagor Automation recommends 24 V DC power for the monitor. Consult Fagor Automation before using
the 12 V DC option.

Power supply.
Never connect both power systems at the same time.

ꞏVGAꞏ Video input.


Plug-in part 15-pin female SUB-D HD type connector.

Pin. Signal.
1 MAINS
2 GREEN
3 BLUE
1 ... 5 4 ---
11 ... 15 5 GND
6 GND_RED
7 GND_GREEN
8 GND_BLUE
9 ---
10 GND_SYNC
11 ---
12 --- CNCelite
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC 8058 8060
15 --- 8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ171ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

ꞏDVI-Dꞏ Video input.


DVI-D video input.

Pin. Señal.
1 TMDS 2- Red- (Link 1).
2 TMDS 2+ Red+ (Link 1).
3 TMDS 2/4 SHIELD
4 TMDS 4- Green- (Link 2).
5 TMDS 4+ Green+ (Link 2).
6 DDC clock.

7. 7
8
9
DDC data.
Not used.
TMDS 1- Green- (Link 1).
10 TMDS 1+ Green+ (Link 1).
MONITOR-21 MULTITOUCH.
Connectors.

11 TMDS 1/3 SHIELD.


12 TMDS 3- Blue- (Link 2).
13 TMDS 3+ Blue+ (Link 2).
14 +5 V DC.
15 GND.
16 Hot plug detection.
17 TMDS 0- Blue- (Link 1) and digital synchronization.
18 TMDS 0+ Blue+ (Link 1) and digital synchronization.
19 TMDS 0/5 SHIELD
20 TMDS 5- Red- (Link 2).
21 TMDS 5+ Red+ (Link 2).
22 TMDS clock protection.
23 TMDS clock+ (Links 1 and 2).
24 TMDS clock- (Links 1 and 2).

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ172ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

7.8 Cable characteristics.

7.8.1 VGA video signal.

Fagor Automation supplies the necessary cable for the VGA connection. The cable is valid for static
installations such as cable carrying chains. For further information, refer to the Ordering Handbook.

Connector pinout.
Plug-in part 15-pin female SUB-D HD type connector.

Pin. Signal.
7.

MONITOR-21 MULTITOUCH.
Cable characteristics.
1 MAINS
2 GREEN
3 BLUE
1 ... 5 4 ---
11 ... 15 5 GND
6 GND_RED
7 GND_GREEN
8 GND_BLUE
9 ---
10 GND_SYNC
11 ---
12 ---
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 ---

Cable characteristics.
Use specific VGA cable.

ꞏVGAꞏ cable.

Type. Shielded.

Flexibility. Normal.
Impedance. 75.

Maximum length. 5 m (16.40 ft).

Consult Fagor Automation before using cables longer than 5 m.


i
Node connection.
Use the VGA output of the central unit. The connection is parallel, 1 with 1, 2 with 2, etc. The
cable shield must be connected to the connector at both ends.

CNC MONITOR
Housing Housing
1 1
RED RED
2 2
GREEN GREEN
3 3
BLUE BLUE
5 5
GND
6 6
GND CNCelite
GND_RED GND_RED
GND_GREEN
7 7
GND_GREEN
8058 8060
8 8
GND_BLUE GND_BLUE 8065 8070
10 10
GND_SYNC GND_SYNC
REF: 2305
13 13
HSYNC HSYNC
14 14
VSYNC VSYNC

ꞏ173ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

7.9 OSD (On Screen Display) menu.

The selected values are stored in the memory of the monitor after pressing the [Menu/Sel]
button at the end of the wait time. The saved values are not lost when the monitor is turned
off. However, the selected value will not be available if the monitor is turned off before the
wait time has been completed. The wait time is approximately 5 seconds, and can be
configured from the OSD menu.

7.9.1 Using the rear keyboard with the OSD menu.

7. The keys on the rear of the monitor have the following functionality when the OSD menu is
active.
MONITOR-21 MULTITOUCH.
OSD (On Screen Display) menu.

Button. Description.

Main OSD menu.


Turns the monitor on and off.
OSD sub-menu.
Turns the monitor on and off.

Main OSD menu.


Exits the OSD menu.
OSD sub-menu.
Returns to the previous menu.

Main OSD menu.


Moves the selector to the left.
OSD sub-menu.
Moves the selector to the left.
Moves the selector up and down.
Increases the value of the selected option.

Main OSD menu.


Moves the selector to the right.
OSD sub-menu.
Moves the selector to the right.
Moves the selector up and down.
Reduces the value of the selected option.

Main OSD menu.


Activates the OSD menu.
OSD sub-menu.
Confirms the selected option.

Main OSD menu.


Changes the video input source.
OSD sub-menu.
Not used.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ174ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

7.9.2 OSD menu.

To display the OSD menu, press the MENU key on the back of the monitor.

7.

MONITOR-21 MULTITOUCH.
OSD (On Screen Display) menu.
Icon. Description.

Video input.

Contrast/Brightness.

Geometry (for DVI input).

Temperature color.

Language.

OSD configuration.

Auto-configuration.

Information.

Restore.

Exit.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ175ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

Video input.
Select this menu icon using the [Left] and [Right] keys and press the [Menu/Sel]
key to confirm the selection.

OSD sub-menu.

7.
MONITOR-21 MULTITOUCH.
OSD (On Screen Display) menu.

Contrast/Brightness.
Select this menu icon using the [Left] and [Right] keys and press the [Menu/Sel]
key to confirm the selection.

OSD sub-menu.

Recall Value Meaning.

Recall Recalls the default values.

REC1 Recalls saved settings 1.

REC2 Recalls saved settings 2.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ176ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

Geometry (for DVI input).


Select this menu icon using the [Left] and [Right] keys and press the [Menu/Sel]
key to confirm the selection.

OSD sub-menu.

7.

MONITOR-21 MULTITOUCH.
OSD (On Screen Display) menu.
Temperature color.
Select this menu icon using the [Left] and [Right] keys and press the [Menu/Sel]
key to confirm the selection.

OSD sub-menu.

Language.
Select this menu icon using the [Left] and [Right] keys and press the [Menu/Sel]
key to confirm the selection.

OSD sub-menu.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ177ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

OSD configuration.
Select this menu icon using the [Left] and [Right] keys and press the [Menu/Sel]
key to confirm the selection.

OSD sub-menu.

7.
MONITOR-21 MULTITOUCH.
OSD (On Screen Display) menu.

Auto-configuration.
Select this menu icon using the [Left] and [Right] keys and press the [Menu/Sel]
key to confirm the selection.

OSD sub-menu.

Information.
Select this menu icon using the [Left] and [Right] keys and press the [Menu/Sel]
key to confirm the selection.

OSD sub-menu.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ178ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

Restore.
Select this menu icon using the [Left] and [Right] keys and press the [Menu/Sel]
key to confirm the selection.

OSD sub-menu.

7.

MONITOR-21 MULTITOUCH.
OSD (On Screen Display) menu.
Exit.
Select this menu icon using the [Left] and [Right] keys and press the [Menu/Sel]
key to confirm the selection.

OSD sub-menu.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ179ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

7.9.3 Locks and unlocks the OSD menu.

Locks the OSD menu.


Press the [Left]+[Right] keys and the following message will appear on
screen.

7.
MONITOR-21 MULTITOUCH.
OSD (On Screen Display) menu.

Do not release the keys until the screen indicates that the operation has
been completed.

Unlocking the OSD menu.


Press the [Left]+[Right] keys and the following message will appear on
screen.

Do not release the keys until the screen indicates that the operation has
been completed.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

Note: All images of the OSD menu are property of Advantech Co., Ltd.

ꞏ180ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

8 HORIZONTAL KEYB.

The machine manufacturer must comply with the EN 60204-1 (IEC-204-1) regulation regarding
electrical shocks in case of defective input/output pins with external power supply when not plugging
the connector before turning the power supply on.

Module. Description.

8.
HORIZONTAL KEYB CAN horizontal, alphanumeric QWERTY keyboard.

HORIZONTAL KEYB.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ181ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

8.1 Specifications.

Type. Description.

General. • CAN horizontal, alphanumeric QWERTY keyboard.


• "Spanish (Spain)”; keyboard layout.
• Dimensions (width x height x depth)
- 420 × 175 × 24 mm.
- 16.54" × 6.89" × 0.94".

8. Operating
conditions.
• Equipment for indoor use in non-hazardous locations, operated by qualified
personnel skilled in its use.
• The equipment must be installed in an enclosure that meets the requirements
described in this manual.
HORIZONTAL KEYB.
Specifications.

• Equipment designed for use in fixed locations.


• Equipment not suitable for wet areas.
• Never use in explosive environments (dangerous areas).

Regulations. • It complies with the European directives for electromagnetic compatibility


2014/30/EU and low voltage 2014/35/EU. See the declaration of conformity,
available on our website.
• UL 61010-1 (Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for
Me a s u r e m e n t , C o n t r o l , a n d L a b o r a t o r y U s e - Pa r t 1: G e n e r a l
Requirements). See the certificate, available on our website.
• IEC/UL 61010-2-201 (Safety requirements for elecrical equipement for
measurement, control and laboratory use. Particular requirements for
control equipment).
• Canadian Standards Associations: CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control
Equipement).

Packaging. • The package meets the regulation EN 60068-2-32 procedure 1 with a


random fall from a height not greater than 1 m.

Ambient. • Storage and transport temperature according to IEC 61131-2:


- Between -40 ºC (-40 ºF) and +70 ºC (158 ºF).
• Work temperature according to IEC 61131-2:
- Between 5 ºC (41 ºF) and 55 ºC (131 ºF).
• Temperature outside cabinet according to IEC 61131-2:
- Between 5 ºC (41 ºF) and 45 ºC (113 ºF).
• Temperature inside the enclosure:
- Less than 55 ºC (131 ºF).
• Relative humidity according to IEC 61131-2:
- 20 ~ 85% RH without condensation.
• Maximum work altitude:
- The unit must work properly at 2000 m according to IEC 61131-2.
• Vibration test according to IEC 60068-2-6 with a frequency step of
1 octave/minute (±10%) and a duration of 10 sweeps.
- 5 Hz  f  8.4 Hz; movement of constant 3.5 mm amplitude (peak value).
- 8.4 Hz  f  150 Hz; 1g acceleration and constant amplitude (peak value).
• Degree of protection according to EN 60529:
- IP65 (front).
• Pollution degree 2 according to IEC/UL 61010-1.

Electrical. • Connection to mains supply: Permanent.


• Operating conditions: Continuous.
• Protection against electric shock: Class III (PE connection is only for
functional earthing).
• OVC I protection level according to IEC/UL 61010-1.

Power supply. • Use a regulated 24 V DC power supply (between -15% and +20%) and 2 A
(including voltage ripple and noise). The power supply must meet the
CNCelite UL1950 standard.
8058 8060 Connectivity. • Connection to the central unit through CAN bus.
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ182ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

8.1.1 Conditions of acceptabity for NRTL certification.

• This equipment is for indoor use in non-hazardous locations, operated by qualified


personnel skilled in its use.
• The equipement shall be supplied with the specified rated voltages according to the
hardware manual.
• The nature of the installation where it is connected must not exceed OVC II.
• The equipment fullfils the requirements of the tested standars only if it is operated

8.
according to the hardware manual.
• The end application has to fulfill the requirements for resistance to mechanical stresses.
• To meet IP 54, the system must be installed in an appropiate enclosure according to the

HORIZONTAL KEYB.
Specifications.
hardware manual.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ183ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

8.2 General diagram.

CNC HORIZONTAL KEYB

CAN

8.
HORIZONTAL KEYB.
General diagram.

Connection. Description.

CAN Communication with CNC.


Maximum length: 500 m (1640 ft).

8.3 Dimensions.

c a

Db b

Da

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070 mm inch mm inch

a 420 16.54 Da 388 15.28

REF: 2305 b 175 6.89 Db 143 5.63

c 24 0.94

ꞏ184ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

8.4 Enclosure and mounting of the module.

8.4.1 Ambient characteristics of the enclosure.

The enclosure must be designed to ensure an ambient temperature of 45 ºC (113 ºF) and
while the unit is running, the inside temperature of the CNC must not exceed 60 ºC (140 ºF).

8.4.2 Enclosure design. 8.

HORIZONTAL KEYB.
Enclosure and mounting of the module.
Before building an enclosure with glass fiber u another poor heat dissipating material, contact Fagor
i Automation.

The enclosure must meet the following requirements:


• Protection degree: IP 54 minimun (according to EN 60529).
• Protection degree: IK 08 minimun (according to IEC 62262).
• Enclosures complying with UL 50 and/or UL 50E and CSA C22.2 Nos. 94.1 or 94.3 for
the intended application, need not be subjected to the applicable requirements in this
standard. Non-metallic materials of enclosures complying with the above standards,
relied upon for containment of fire within the equipment, shall have a minimun
flammability rating of V-1.
• The enclosure must have enough surface area to evacuate by convection the heat
generated inside.
• The enclosure must respect the minimum distances recommended between the
enclosure walls and the central unit to let the air flow and improve heat dissipation.
• In the connector area, reserve a space that allows the cables to be connected, respecting
their radius of curvature.
• Keep the enclosure clean.

Dimensions of the cut off part and the enclosure.

mm inch mm inch

W 392 15.43 D 74 2.91

H 147 5.79 e 1.5 - 4 0.06 - 0.16


CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ185ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

8.4.3 Securing the module.

The module must be installed in a proper enclosure that may be located on the machine or
on an external support. To insert the unit into the enclosure, it must have a big enough hole
to allow to insert it easily, without obstacles and without forcing the unit. See "8.4.1 Ambient
characteristics of the enclosure." on page 185.

The module is mounted from inside the enclosure. Once the unit has been inserted into the
enclosure, secure it from the inside with the tension jacks. To properly secure it, use all the
tension jacks on the back of the unit. Apply a tightening torque of 0.7 Nm.

8.
HORIZONTAL KEYB.
Enclosure and mounting of the module.

1 2

0.7 Nm

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ186ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

8.5 Power supply for the module.

• Use a regulated 24 V DC power supply.


• The unit must be powered with class DVC A power supply with a SELV/PELV protection
output voltage.
• For all connections and terminals of electronic modules, use only power supplies that
provide SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) or PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage) output
voltages.

24 V DC 24 V DC universal power supply, via Phoenix


8.
connector. See "24 V DC voltage supply." on page 189.

HORIZONTAL KEYB.
Power supply for the module.
Connector pinout.
Plug-in part. 3-pole Phoenix-type combicon connector (7.62 mm
pitch).

Pin Signal. Function.


1 Chassis.

2 GND 0 V reference signal.


1
3 +24 V Power supply.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ187ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

8.6 Hardware functionalities.

8.6.1 Ground connection.

It is up to the system integrator to meet all the requirements of local and national electrical codes as
well as all the regulations applicable regarding the grounding of the whole unit.

8. Ground connection.
HORIZONTAL KEYB.
Hardware functionalities.

8.6.2 Rear connectors.

B B A
E
C D

(A) 24 V DC voltage supply.


(B) CAN bus.
(C) Bus switch and transmission speed.
(D) Address (node) of the element.
(E) Line terminating resistor.
(F) Not being used.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ188ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

24 V DC voltage supply.
Plug-in part. 3-pole Phoenix-type combicon connector (7.62 mm
pitch).

Pin Signal. Function.


1 Chassis.

2 GND 0 V reference signal.


1
3 +24 V Power supply.

8.
Connector data.
Number of poles. 3.
Pitch. 7.62 mm.
Connection technique. Screw connection.

HORIZONTAL KEYB.
Hardware functionalities.
Minimum/maximum tightening torque. 0.5 / 0.6 Nm.
Minimum/maximum section. 0.2 / 2.5 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 24 / 12.
Rated current In. 12 A.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped. 7 mm.

See "8.5 Power supply for the module." on page 187.

CAN bus.
Plug-in part. 5-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm
pitch).

Pin. Signal. Function.


1 GND Ground / 0 V.
2 CL (LOW) bus signal.
3 SH CAN shield.
4 CH (HIGH) bus signal.
5 SH Not being used.

Connector data.
Number of poles. 5.
Pitch. 3.5 mm.
Connection technique. Screw connection.
Minimum/maximum tightening torque. 0.22 / 0.25 Nm.
Minimum/maximum section. 0.14 / 1.5 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 28 / 16.
Rated current In. 8 A.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped. 7 mm.
See "8.7 Bus CAN (CANopen protocol)." on page 191.

CAN bus. Address (node) of the element within the bus (0-15).
Each one of the elements integrated into the CAN bus is identified
by the 16-position rotary switch (0-15) "Address" (also referred to
as "Node_Select"). The CNC must always occupy position "0" and
the rest of the elements of the bus will occupy consecutive
positions starting with "1".
CNCelite
8058 8060
The "Address" switch also sets the priority of the node within the bus; the lower the number
8065 8070
the higher the priority. We recommend the keyboard and jog panel to be the last nodes of
the bus.
REF: 2305

ꞏ189ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

CAN bus. Address (node) of the element within the bus (16-31).

Switch ꞏ4ꞏ of the DIP switch selects the positions or elements integrated in the CAN bus may
be expanded up to 32.

DS ꞏ4ꞏ Address (node) of the element.

off Positions 0-15 within the bus.

on Positions 16-31 within the bus.

8. CAN bus. CAN bus type selection (CANopen).


HORIZONTAL KEYB.
Hardware functionalities.

Switch ꞏ1ꞏ of the DIP switch selects the type of CAN bus.

DS ꞏ1ꞏ Type of CAN bus.

off Not being used.

on CANopen bus.

CAN bus. Selecting the speed for the CANopen bus.

When using the CANopen protocol, the transmission speed at the bus is defined in each node
and they all must run at the same speed. The speed is selected with switches ꞏ2ꞏ and ꞏ3ꞏ
of the DIP switch and it depends on the total length of the bus. Using the following illustrative
values; assigning other values may cause communication errors due to signal distortion.

DS ꞏ2ꞏ DSꞏ3ꞏ Speed Length of the CAN bus.

on on 1000 kHz Up to 20 meters.

off on 800 kHz From 20 to 40 meters.

on off 500 kHz From 40 to 100 meters.

off off 250 kHz From 100 to 500 meters.

CAN bus. Line terminating resistor (ꞏLTꞏ selector).


The ꞏLTꞏ switch identifies which are the elements that occupy the
ends of the CAN bus; that is, the first and last physical element in
the connection. The terminating elements must have the resistor
activated (position 1) but not the rest of the elements (position 0).

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ190ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

8.7 Bus CAN (CANopen protocol).

CANopen is a network communication protocol based on the CAN bus, for connecting the
CNC with remote modules and keyboards. The CAN connection supports up to 32 devices
(nodes), including the central unit; more one than keyboard and several groups of remote
modules are possible.

CAN connector.
Plug-in part. 5-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm
pitch). 8.
Pin. Signal. Function.

HORIZONTAL KEYB.
Bus CAN (CANopen protocol).
1 GND Ground / 0 V.
2 CL (LOW) bus signal.
3 SH CAN shield.
4 CH (HIGH) bus signal.
5 SH Not being used.

The cable shield must be connected to the connector at both ends. The connector has two
shield pins. Both pins are equivalent and the CAN shield may be connected to either one.

CAN cable characteristics.


Use a specific CAN cable. The ends of all the wires and the shield must be protected by the
corresponding terminal (pin). Also use the terminals (pins) to secure the cable to the
connector.

General characteristics.

Type. Shielded. Twisted pair (1 x 2 x 0.22 mm²).

Flexibility. Extremely flexible. Minimum bending radius, static = 50 mm and


dynamic = 95 mm.

Cover. PUR

Impedance. Cat.5 (100 - 120)

Module interconnection.
Respect the cable's minimum bending radius when connecting it. They must be connected
in series; on elements having two CAN connectors, either one may be used. Once the
elements have been connected, define their logic order in the bus and the transmission
speed.

CNC JOG PANEL MODULE 1 MODULE 2

BCD B CD BCD BCD

ADDRESS = 0 ADDRESS = 3 ADDRESS = 1 ADDRESS = 2


F0 1

F0 1

F0 1

F0 1
78 9

78 9

78 9

78 9

3 45 34 5 34 5 34 5

ADD MSB = 0 ADD MSB = 0


Line Term = 1 Line Term = 0 Line Term = 0 Line Term = 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

X2 X2 X2
ISO GND ISO GND ISO GND ISO GND
CAN L CAN L CAN L CAN L
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD CNCelite
CAN H
SHIELD
CAN H
SHIELD
CAN H
SHIELD
CAN H
SHIELD
8058 8060
8065 8070
X3 X3 X3
ISO GND ISO GND ISO GND
CAN L CAN L CAN L
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD REF: 2305
CAN H CAN H CAN H
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD

The drawing shows the CAN connection between the CPU (central unit), the operator panel and 2
groups of RIOR or RIO5 series remote modules.

ꞏ191ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

8.7.1 Identification of the modules at the bus.

Each one of the elements integrated into the CAN bus is identified by its address or node
number. The CNC must always occupy position "0" and the rest of the elements of the bus
will occupy consecutive positions starting with "1". The node address or number also sets
the priority of the group within the bus; the lower the number the higher the priority. We
recommend to set the priority of the groups as follows (from highest to lowest).
• The groups that have the feedback inputs.
• The groups that have analog inputs and outputs.

8. • The groups that have digital inputs and outputs.


• The keyboard and jog panel.
HORIZONTAL KEYB.
Bus CAN (CANopen protocol).

In order for any change in the identification of the module to take effect, the CNC must be
restarted and turn off/on the corresponding module; however, we recommend to change the
address while the modules and the CNC are off.

Configuring the address (node number).

Address (node) of the element within the bus (0-15).


Each one of the elements integrated into the CAN bus is identified
by the 16-position rotary switch (0-15) "Address" (also referred to
as "Node_Select").

Address (node) of the element within the bus (16-31).

Switch ꞏ4ꞏ of the DIP switch selects the positions or elements integrated in the CAN bus may
be expanded up to 32.

DS ꞏ4ꞏ Address (node) of the element.


off Positions 0-15 within the bus.

on Positions 16-31 within the bus.

ADDRESS = 2 ADDRESS = 18
BCD BCD
89 A

89 A
EF 2

EF 2

ADDRESS = 2 ADDRESS = 2
01

01
67

67

34 5 345

ID4 = 0 ID4 = 1
ID3 ID3
ID2 ID2
ID1 ID1
ON ON

ADDRESS 0 1 2 3 ꞏꞏꞏ 13 14 15

DS4 = 0 0 1 2 3 ꞏꞏꞏ 13 14 15

DS4 = 1 16 17 18 19 ꞏꞏꞏ 29 30 31

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ192ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

8.7.2 Identification of the first and last elements of the bus.

In the CAN bus, it is necessary to use a line terminating resistor to identify which are the
elements that occupy the ends of the bus; i.e. the first and last physical element in the
connection. For the central unit, the terminating resistor is factory installed because the CNC
is always at one end of the bus.
In the other elements, the ꞏLTꞏ switch identifies which are the
elements that occupy the ends of the CAN bus; that is, the first and
last physical element in the connection. The terminating elements
must have the resistor activated (position 1) but not the rest of the
elements (position 0). 8.

HORIZONTAL KEYB.
Bus CAN (CANopen protocol).
8.7.3 CAN bus type selection (CANopen).

Switch ꞏ1ꞏ of the DIP switch selects the type of CAN bus.

DS ꞏ1ꞏ Type of CAN bus.

off Not being used.

on CANopen bus.

8.7.4 Selecting the speed for the CANopen bus.

When using the CANopen protocol, the transmission speed at the bus is defined in each node
and they all must run at the same speed. The speed is selected with switches ꞏ2ꞏ and ꞏ3ꞏ
of the DIP switch and it depends on the total length of the bus. Using the following illustrative
values; assigning other values may cause communication errors due to signal distortion.

DS ꞏ2ꞏ DSꞏ3ꞏ Speed Length of the CAN bus.

on on 1000 kHz Up to 20 meters.

off on 800 kHz From 20 to 40 meters.

on off 500 kHz From 40 to 100 meters.

off off 250 kHz From 100 to 500 meters.

The speed of 250 kHz is only available to communicate with the keyboards, RIOW and RIOW
series remote modules; this speed is not available at the RIO5 series remote modules.

In order for any change of speed to be assumed, the corresponding module must be reset;
however, we recommend to change the speed while the modules and the CNC are off.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ193ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

8.
HORIZONTAL KEYB.
Bus CAN (CANopen protocol).

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ194ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

9 VERTICAL KEYB.

The machine manufacturer must comply with the EN 60204-1 (IEC-204-1) regulation regarding
electrical shocks in case of defective input/output pins with external power supply when not plugging
the connector before turning the power supply on.

Module. Description.

9.
VERTICAL KEYB CAN vertical, alphanumeric keyboard.

VERTICAL KEYB.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ195ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

9.1 Specifications.

Type. Description.

General. • CAN vertical, alphanumeric keyboard.


• "Spanish (Spain)”; keyboard layout.
• Dimensions (width x height x depth)
- 153 × 350 × 24 mm.
- 6.02" × 13.78" × 0.94".

9. Operating
conditions.
• Equipment for indoor use in non-hazardous locations, operated by qualified
personnel skilled in its use.
• The equipment must be installed in an enclosure that meets the requirements
described in this manual.
VERTICAL KEYB.
Specifications.

• Equipment designed for use in fixed locations.


• Equipment not suitable for wet areas.
• Never use in explosive environments (dangerous areas).

Regulations. • It complies with the European directives for electromagnetic compatibility


2014/30/EU and low voltage 2014/35/EU. See the declaration of conformity,
available on our website.
• UL 61010-1 (Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for
Me a s u r e m e n t , C o n t r o l , a n d L a b o r a t o r y U s e - Pa r t 1: G e n e r a l
Requirements). See the certificate, available on our website.
• IEC/UL 61010-2-201 (Safety requirements for elecrical equipement for
measurement, control and laboratory use. Particular requirements for
control equipment).
• Canadian Standards Associations: CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control
Equipement).

Packaging. • The package meets the regulation EN 60068-2-32 procedure 1 with a


random fall from a height not greater than 1 m.

Ambient. • Storage and transport temperature according to IEC 61131-2:


- Between -40 ºC (-40 ºF) and +70 ºC (158 ºF).
• Work temperature according to IEC 61131-2:
- Between 5 ºC (41 ºF) and 55 ºC (131 ºF).
• Temperature outside cabinet according to IEC 61131-2:
- Between 5 ºC (41 ºF) and 45 ºC (113 ºF).
• Temperature inside the enclosure:
- Less than 55 ºC (131 ºF).
• Relative humidity according to IEC 61131-2:
- 20 ~ 85% RH without condensation.
• Maximum work altitude:
- The unit must work properly at 2000 m according to IEC 61131-2.
• Vibration test according to IEC 60068-2-6 with a frequency step of
1 octave/minute (±10%) and a duration of 10 sweeps.
- 5 Hz  f  8.4 Hz; movement of constant 3.5 mm amplitude (peak value).
- 8.4 Hz  f  150 Hz; 1g acceleration and constant amplitude (peak value).
• Degree of protection according to EN 60529:
- IP65 (front).
• Pollution degree 2 according to IEC/UL 61010-1.

Electrical. • Connection to mains supply: Permanent.


• Operating conditions: Continuous.
• Protection against electric shock: Class III (PE connection is only for
functional earthing).
• OVC I protection level according to IEC/UL 61010-1.

Power supply. • Use a regulated 24 V DC power supply (between -15% and +20%) and 2 A
(including voltage ripple and noise). The power supply must meet the
CNCelite UL1950 standard.
8058 8060 Connectivity. • Connection to the central unit through CAN bus.
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ196ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

9.1.1 Conditions of acceptabity for NRTL certification.

• This equipment is for indoor use in non-hazardous locations, operated by qualified


personnel skilled in its use.
• The equipement shall be supplied with the specified rated voltages according to the
hardware manual.
• The nature of the installation where it is connected must not exceed OVC II.
• The equipment fullfils the requirements of the tested standars only if it is operated

9.
according to the hardware manual.
• The end application has to fulfill the requirements for resistance to mechanical stresses.
• To meet IP 54, the system must be installed in an appropiate enclosure according to the

VERTICAL KEYB.
Specifications.
hardware manual.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ197ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

9.2 General diagram.

CNC VERTICAL KEYB

9. CAN
VERTICAL KEYB.
General diagram.

Connection. Description.

CAN Communication with CNC.


Maximum length: 500 m (1640 ft).

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ198ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

9.3 Dimensions.

c a

9.

VERTICAL KEYB.
Dimensions.
Db b

Da

mm inch mm inch

a 153 6.02 Da 121 4.76


b 350 13.78 Db 318 12.52

c 24 0.94

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ199ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

9.4 Enclosure and mounting of the module.

9.4.1 Ambient characteristics of the enclosure.

The enclosure must be designed to ensure an ambient temperature of 45 ºC (113 ºF) and
while the unit is running, the inside temperature of the CNC must not exceed 60 ºC (140 ºF).

9. 9.4.2 Enclosure design.


VERTICAL KEYB.
Enclosure and mounting of the module.

Before building an enclosure with glass fiber u another poor heat dissipating material, contact Fagor
i Automation.

The enclosure must meet the following requirements:


• Protection degree: IP 54 minimun (according to EN 60529).
• Protection degree: IK 08 minimun (according to IEC 62262).
• Enclosures complying with UL 50 and/or UL 50E and CSA C22.2 Nos. 94.1 or 94.3 for
the intended application, need not be subjected to the applicable requirements in this
standard. Non-metallic materials of enclosures complying with the above standards,
relied upon for containment of fire within the equipment, shall have a minimun
flammability rating of V-1.
• The enclosure must have enough surface area to evacuate by convection the heat
generated inside.
• The enclosure must respect the minimum distances recommended between the
enclosure walls and the central unit to let the air flow and improve heat dissipation.
• In the connector area, reserve a space that allows the cables to be connected, respecting
their radius of curvature.
• Keep the enclosure clean.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ200ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

Dimensions of the cut off part and the enclosure.

H
9.

VERTICAL KEYB.
Enclosure and mounting of the module.
W

mm inch mm inch

W 125 4.92 D 74 2.91

H 322 12.68 e 1.5 - 4 0.06 - 0.16

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ201ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

9.4.3 Securing the module.

The module must be installed in a proper enclosure that may be located on the machine or
on an external support. To insert the unit into the enclosure, it must have a big enough hole
to allow to insert it easily, without obstacles and without forcing the unit. See "9.4.1 Ambient
characteristics of the enclosure." on page 200.

The module is mounted from inside the enclosure. Once the unit has been inserted into the
enclosure, secure it from the inside with the tension jacks. To properly secure it, use all the
tension jacks on the back of the unit. Apply a tightening torque of 0.7 Nm.

9.
VERTICAL KEYB.
Enclosure and mounting of the module.

1 2

0.7 Nm

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ202ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

9.5 Power supply for the module.

• Use a regulated 24 V DC power supply.


• The unit must be powered with class DVC A power supply with a SELV/PELV protection
output voltage.
• For all connections and terminals of electronic modules, use only power supplies that
provide SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) or PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage) output
voltages.

24 V DC 24 V DC universal power supply, via Phoenix


9.
connector. See "24 V DC voltage supply." on page 205.

VERTICAL KEYB.
Power supply for the module.
Connector pinout.
Plug-in part. 3-pole Phoenix-type combicon connector (7.62 mm
pitch).

Pin Signal. Function.


1 Chassis.

2 GND 0 V reference signal.


1
3 +24 V Power supply.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ203ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

9.6 Hardware functionalities.

9.6.1 Ground connection.

It is up to the system integrator to meet all the requirements of local and national electrical codes as
well as all the regulations applicable regarding the grounding of the whole unit.

9.
VERTICAL KEYB.
Hardware functionalities.

Ground connection.

9.6.2 Rear connectors.

B B A
E
C D

(A) 24 V DC voltage supply.


CNCelite (B) CAN bus.
8058 8060 (C) Bus switch and transmission speed.
(D) Address (node) of the element.
8065 8070 (E) Line terminating resistor.
(F) Not being used.

REF: 2305

ꞏ204ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

24 V DC voltage supply.
Plug-in part. 3-pole Phoenix-type combicon connector (7.62 mm
pitch).

Pin Signal. Function.


1 Chassis.

2 GND 0 V reference signal.


1
3 +24 V Power supply.

Connector data.
Number of poles.
Pitch.
3.
7.62 mm.
9.
Connection technique. Screw connection.

VERTICAL KEYB.
Hardware functionalities.
Minimum/maximum tightening torque. 0.5 / 0.6 Nm.
Minimum/maximum section. 0.2 / 2.5 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 24 / 12.
Rated current In. 12 A.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped. 7 mm.

See "9.5 Power supply for the module." on page 203.

CAN bus.
Plug-in part. 5-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm
pitch).

Pin. Signal. Function.


1 GND Ground / 0 V.
2 CL (LOW) bus signal.
3 SH CAN shield.
4 CH (HIGH) bus signal.
5 SH Not being used.

Connector data.
Number of poles. 5.
Pitch. 3.5 mm.
Connection technique. Screw connection.
Minimum/maximum tightening torque. 0.22 / 0.25 Nm.
Minimum/maximum section. 0.14 / 1.5 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 28 / 16.
Rated current In. 8 A.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped. 7 mm.

See "9.7 Bus CAN (CANopen protocol)." on page 207.

CAN bus. Address (node) of the element within the bus (0-15).
Each one of the elements integrated into the CAN bus is identified
by the 16-position rotary switch (0-15) "Address" (also referred to
as "Node_Select"). The CNC must always occupy position "0" and
the rest of the elements of the bus will occupy consecutive
positions starting with "1".
CNCelite
8058 8060
The "Address" switch also sets the priority of the node within the bus; the lower the number 8065 8070
the higher the priority. We recommend the keyboard and jog panel to be the last nodes of
the bus.
REF: 2305

ꞏ205ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

CAN bus. Address (node) of the element within the bus (16-31).

Switch ꞏ4ꞏ of the DIP switch selects the positions or elements integrated in the CAN bus may
be expanded up to 32.

DS ꞏ4ꞏ Address (node) of the element.

off Positions 0-15 within the bus.

on Positions 16-31 within the bus.

9. CAN bus. CAN bus type selection (CANopen).


VERTICAL KEYB.
Hardware functionalities.

Switch ꞏ1ꞏ of the DIP switch selects the type of CAN bus.

DS ꞏ1ꞏ Type of CAN bus.

off Not being used.

on CANopen bus.

CAN bus. Selecting the speed for the CANopen bus.

When using the CANopen protocol, the transmission speed at the bus is defined in each node
and they all must run at the same speed. The speed is selected with switches ꞏ2ꞏ and ꞏ3ꞏ
of the DIP switch and it depends on the total length of the bus. Using the following illustrative
values; assigning other values may cause communication errors due to signal distortion.

DS ꞏ2ꞏ DSꞏ3ꞏ Speed Length of the CAN bus.

on on 1000 kHz Up to 20 meters.

off on 800 kHz From 20 to 40 meters.

on off 500 kHz From 40 to 100 meters.

off off 250 kHz From 100 to 500 meters.

CAN bus. Line terminating resistor (ꞏLTꞏ selector).


The ꞏLTꞏ switch identifies which are the elements that occupy the
ends of the CAN bus; that is, the first and last physical element in
the connection. The terminating elements must have the resistor
activated (position 1) but not the rest of the elements (position 0).

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ206ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

9.7 Bus CAN (CANopen protocol).

CANopen is a network communication protocol based on the CAN bus, for connecting the
CNC with remote modules and keyboards. The CAN connection supports up to 32 devices
(nodes), including the central unit; more one than keyboard and several groups of remote
modules are possible.

CAN connector.
Plug-in part. 5-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm
pitch). 9.
Pin. Signal. Function.

VERTICAL KEYB.
Bus CAN (CANopen protocol).
1 GND Ground / 0 V.
2 CL (LOW) bus signal.
3 SH CAN shield.
4 CH (HIGH) bus signal.
5 SH Not being used.

The cable shield must be connected to the connector at both ends. The connector has two
shield pins. Both pins are equivalent and the CAN shield may be connected to either one.

CAN cable characteristics.


Use a specific CAN cable. The ends of all the wires and the shield must be protected by the
corresponding terminal (pin). Also use the terminals (pins) to secure the cable to the
connector.

General characteristics.

Type. Shielded. Twisted pair (1 x 2 x 0.22 mm²).

Flexibility. Extremely flexible. Minimum bending radius, static = 50 mm and


dynamic = 95 mm.

Cover. PUR

Impedance. Cat.5 (100 - 120)

Module interconnection.
Respect the cable's minimum bending radius when connecting it. They must be connected
in series; on elements having two CAN connectors, either one may be used. Once the
elements have been connected, define their logic order in the bus and the transmission
speed.

CNC JOG PANEL MODULE 1 MODULE 2

BCD B CD BCD BCD

ADDRESS = 0 ADDRESS = 3 ADDRESS = 1 ADDRESS = 2


F0 1

F0 1

F0 1

F0 1
78 9

78 9

78 9

78 9

3 45 34 5 34 5 34 5

ADD MSB = 0 ADD MSB = 0


Line Term = 1 Line Term = 0 Line Term = 0 Line Term = 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

X2 X2 X2
ISO GND ISO GND ISO GND ISO GND
CAN L CAN L CAN L CAN L
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD CNCelite
CAN H
SHIELD
CAN H
SHIELD
CAN H
SHIELD
CAN H
SHIELD
8058 8060
8065 8070
X3 X3 X3
ISO GND ISO GND ISO GND
CAN L CAN L CAN L
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD REF: 2305
CAN H CAN H CAN H
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD

The drawing shows the CAN connection between the CPU (central unit), the operator panel and 2
groups of RIOR or RIO5 series remote modules.

ꞏ207ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

9.7.1 Identification of the modules at the bus.

Each one of the elements integrated into the CAN bus is identified by its address or node
number. The CNC must always occupy position "0" and the rest of the elements of the bus
will occupy consecutive positions starting with "1". The node address or number also sets
the priority of the group within the bus; the lower the number the higher the priority. We
recommend to set the priority of the groups as follows (from highest to lowest).
• The groups that have the feedback inputs.
• The groups that have analog inputs and outputs.

9. • The groups that have digital inputs and outputs.


• The keyboard and jog panel.
VERTICAL KEYB.
Bus CAN (CANopen protocol).

In order for any change in the identification of the module to take effect, the CNC must be
restarted and turn off/on the corresponding module; however, we recommend to change the
address while the modules and the CNC are off.

Configuring the address (node number).

Address (node) of the element within the bus (0-15).


Each one of the elements integrated into the CAN bus is identified
by the 16-position rotary switch (0-15) "Address" (also referred to
as "Node_Select").

Address (node) of the element within the bus (16-31).

Switch ꞏ4ꞏ of the DIP switch selects the positions or elements integrated in the CAN bus may
be expanded up to 32.

DS ꞏ4ꞏ Address (node) of the element.


off Positions 0-15 within the bus.

on Positions 16-31 within the bus.

ADDRESS = 2 ADDRESS = 18
BCD BCD
89 A

89 A
EF 2

EF 2

ADDRESS = 2 ADDRESS = 2
01

01
67

67

34 5 345

ID4 = 0 ID4 = 1
ID3 ID3
ID2 ID2
ID1 ID1
ON ON

ADDRESS 0 1 2 3 ꞏꞏꞏ 13 14 15

DS4 = 0 0 1 2 3 ꞏꞏꞏ 13 14 15

DS4 = 1 16 17 18 19 ꞏꞏꞏ 29 30 31

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ208ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

9.7.2 Identification of the first and last elements of the bus.

In the CAN bus, it is necessary to use a line terminating resistor to identify which are the
elements that occupy the ends of the bus; i.e. the first and last physical element in the
connection. For the central unit, the terminating resistor is factory installed because the CNC
is always at one end of the bus.
In the other elements, the ꞏLTꞏ switch identifies which are the
elements that occupy the ends of the CAN bus; that is, the first and
last physical element in the connection. The terminating elements
must have the resistor activated (position 1) but not the rest of the
elements (position 0). 9.

VERTICAL KEYB.
Bus CAN (CANopen protocol).
9.7.3 CAN bus type selection (CANopen).

Switch ꞏ1ꞏ of the DIP switch selects the type of CAN bus.

DS ꞏ1ꞏ Type of CAN bus.

off Not being used.

on CANopen bus.

9.7.4 Selecting the speed for the CANopen bus.

When using the CANopen protocol, the transmission speed at the bus is defined in each node
and they all must run at the same speed. The speed is selected with switches ꞏ2ꞏ and ꞏ3ꞏ
of the DIP switch and it depends on the total length of the bus. Using the following illustrative
values; assigning other values may cause communication errors due to signal distortion.

DS ꞏ2ꞏ DSꞏ3ꞏ Speed Length of the CAN bus.

on on 1000 kHz Up to 20 meters.

off on 800 kHz From 20 to 40 meters.

on off 500 kHz From 40 to 100 meters.

off off 250 kHz From 100 to 500 meters.

The speed of 250 kHz is only available to communicate with the keyboards, RIOW and RIOW
series remote modules; this speed is not available at the RIO5 series remote modules.

In order for any change of speed to be assumed, the corresponding module must be reset;
however, we recommend to change the speed while the modules and the CNC are off.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ209ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

9.
VERTICAL KEYB.
Bus CAN (CANopen protocol).

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ210ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

10 HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0 + TOUCHPAD.

Model. Description.

HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0 + • USB horizontal, alphanumeric QWERTY keyboard.


TOUCHPAD • Multi-touch touchpad (touch panel).
• Numeric keypad optimized to operate with the CNC (keys for
axes, feedrate, speed, etc).
• Special functions with the Fagor key.
10.

HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0 + TOUCHPAD.


In the operating system, customize the keyboard arrangement as "English (United States)". See
i "10.7 Selecting the language and the keyboard distribution." on page 219.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ211ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

10.1 Specifications.

Type. Description.

General. • USB horizontal, alphanumeric QWERTY keyboard.


• Multi-touch touchpad (touch panel).
• Numeric keypad optimized to operate with the CNC (keys for axes, feedrate,
speed, etc).
• Special functions with the Fagor key.
• Keyboard distribution; "English (United States)".

10. • Dimensions (width x height x depth)


- 420 × 175 × 34 mm.
- 16.54" × 6.89" × 1.33".
Specifications.
HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0 + TOUCHPAD.

• Weight: 3,065 kg (6.75 lb)

Operating • Equipment for indoor use in non-hazardous locations, operated by qualified


conditions. personnel skilled in its use.
• The equipment must be installed in an enclosure that meets the requirements
described in this manual.
• Equipment designed for use in fixed locations.
• Equipment not suitable for wet areas.
• Never use in explosive environments (dangerous areas).

Regulations. • It complies with the European directives for electromagnetic compatibility


2014/30/EU and low voltage 2014/35/EU. See the declaration of conformity,
available on our website.
• UL 61010-1 (Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for
Me a s u r e m e n t , C o n t r o l , a n d L a b o r a t o r y U s e - Pa r t 1: G e n e r a l
Requirements). See the certificate, available on our website.
• IEC/UL 61010-2-201 (Safety requirements for elecrical equipement for
measurement, control and laboratory use. Particular requirements for
control equipment).
• Canadian Standards Associations: CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control
Equipement).

Packaging. • The package meets the regulation EN 60068-2-32 procedure 1 with a


random fall from a height not greater than 1 m.

Ambient. • Storage and transport temperature according to IEC 61131-2:


- Between -40 ºC (-40 ºF) and +70 ºC (158 ºF).
• Work temperature according to IEC 61131-2:
- Between 5 ºC (41 ºF) and 55 ºC (131 ºF).
• Temperature outside cabinet according to IEC 61131-2:
- Between 5 ºC (41 ºF) and 45 ºC (113 ºF).
• Temperature inside the enclosure:
- Less than 55 ºC (131 ºF).
• Relative humidity according to IEC 61131-2:
- 20 ~ 85% RH without condensation.
• Maximum work altitude:
- The unit must work properly at 2000 m according to IEC 61131-2.
• Vibration test according to IEC 60068-2-6 with a frequency step of
1 octave/minute (±10%) and a duration of 10 sweeps.
- 5 Hz  f  8.4 Hz; movement of constant 3.5 mm amplitude (peak value).
- 8.4 Hz  f  150 Hz; 1g acceleration and constant amplitude (peak value).
• Degree of protection according to EN 60529:
- IP65 (front).
• Pollution degree 2 according to IEC/UL 61010-1.

Power supply. • Power through the USB cable.


• Maximum consumption: 0.5 W.
CNCelite Connectivity. • Connection to the central unit through USB-B 2.0 (rear).
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ212ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

10.1.1 Conditions of acceptabity for NRTL certification.

• This equipment is for indoor use in non-hazardous locations, operated by qualified


personnel skilled in its use.
• The equipement shall be supplied with the specified rated voltages according to the
hardware manual.
• The nature of the installation where it is connected must not exceed OVC II.
• The equipment fullfils the requirements of the tested standars only if it is operated

10.
according to the hardware manual.
• The end application has to fulfill the requirements for resistance to mechanical stresses.
• To meet IP 54, the system must be installed in an appropiate enclosure according to the

Specifications.
HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0 + TOUCHPAD.
hardware manual.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ213ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

10.2 General diagram.

• Do not replace the cable supplied by Fagor.


• Do not connect any type of extension cord to the USB power cable.
• Connect the keyboard directly to the central unit; do not connect the keyboard to any type of hub.

CNC HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0 + TOUCHPAD.

10. USB
General diagram.
HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0 + TOUCHPAD.

CNC PPC-21W

ETHERNET

CAN USB

OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE-A HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0 + TOUCHPAD

Connection. Description.
USB Connection of a USB keyboard to the panel-PC. Use the keyboard cable.
Maximum cable length: 800 mm (2.62 ft).

Ethernet. Connecting the CNC to the panel-PC.


Maximum cable length: 100 m (328 ft).

CAN Connection of the operator panel.


Maximum length of bus; 500 m (1640 ft).

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ214ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

10.3 Dimensions.

c a

Db b 10.

HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0 + TOUCHPAD.


Dimensions.
Da

mm inch mm inch
a 420 16.54 Da 388 15.28

b 175 6.89 Db 143 5.63

c 34 1.33
d 800 31.50

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ215ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

10.4 Enclosure and mounting of the module.

10.4.1 Enclosure design.

Before building an enclosure with glass fiber u another poor heat dissipating material, contact Fagor
i Automation.

The enclosure must meet the following requirements:

10.
• Protection degree: IP 54 minimun (according to EN 60529).
• Protection degree: IK 08 minimun (according to IEC 62262).
• Enclosures complying with UL 50 and/or UL 50E and CSA C22.2 Nos. 94.1 or 94.3 for
Enclosure and mounting of the module.
HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0 + TOUCHPAD.

the intended application, need not be subjected to the applicable requirements in this
standard. Non-metallic materials of enclosures complying with the above standards,
relied upon for containment of fire within the equipment, shall have a minimun
flammability rating of V-1.
• The enclosure must have enough surface area to evacuate by convection the heat
generated inside.
• The enclosure must respect the minimum distances recommended between the
enclosure walls and the central unit to let the air flow and improve heat dissipation.
• In the connector area, reserve a space that allows the cables to be connected, respecting
their radius of curvature.
• Keep the enclosure clean.

Dimensions of the cut off part and the enclosure.

H
R

General tolerance for W and H = ±0.5 mm (0.02 inches). D


Maximum radius of the corners = 5 mm (0.2 inches).

mm inch mm inch

W 392 15.43 D (*) 74 2.91

H 147 5.79 e 1.5 - 4 0.06 - 0.16

(*) Minimum recommended distance.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ216ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

10.4.2 Securing the module.

The module must be installed in a proper enclosure that may be located on the machine or
on an external support. To insert the unit into the enclosure, it must have a big enough hole
to allow to insert it easily, without obstacles and without forcing the unit. See
"10.4.1 Enclosure design." on page 216.

The module is mounted from inside the enclosure. Once the unit has been inserted into the
enclosure, secure it from the inside with the tension jacks. To properly secure it, use all the
tension jacks on the back of the unit. Apply a tightening torque of 0.7 Nm.

10.

Enclosure and mounting of the module.


HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0 + TOUCHPAD.
1 2

0.7 Nm

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ217ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

10.5 Voltage supply for the module.

Power the module through the keyboard’s USB cable.

Rear view.

10.
Voltage supply for the module.
HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0 + TOUCHPAD.

USB power cable.

• Do not replace the cable supplied by Fagor.


• Do not connect any type of extension cord to the USB power cable.
• Connect the keyboard directly to the central unit; do not connect the keyboard to any type of hub.

Cable characteristics.

Characteristic. Description.

Type. USB cable, type A-B.


Shielded cable. 4-Wire cable in twisted pairs.

Characteristic impedance. 90  ± 15 %.
Length. 0.8 meters (0.03 inches).

Bending radius. Fixed installation: 5 x d (d=7 mm).


Flexible installation: 10 x d (d=7 mm).

Resistance to oils. Meets the DIN EN 60811-2-1 standard

Consumption.
Maximum consumption: 0.5 W.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ218ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

10.6 Connectors.

The connectors are in the rear.

Side view.

Ground connection.

10.

Connectors.
HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0 + TOUCHPAD.
10.7 Selecting the language and the keyboard distribution.

In the operating system, customize the input language and the keyboard distribution as
"English (United States)". The keyboard distribution controls the characters that appear on
screen when the keys are pressed. If the keyboard distribution is not assigned to this
language, it is possible that the characters on screen will not match the characters of the
keys.

In order to change the keyboard distribution, the desired input language and keyboard
distribution must be added to Windows.

Adding an input language and a keyboard distribution.


1 Click on the Start menu > Control panel > Regional and language configuration.
Depending on how Windows is configured, it may be necessary to first select "Clock,
language and region".

2 Click on the "Keyboards and languages" tab and then click on "Change keyboards".

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ219ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

3 In the "Installed services” section, click on the button "Add". Add the desired input
language and the keyboard distribution (in this case, English (United States)). Click on
"OK" to finish.

10.
HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0 + TOUCHPAD.
Selecting the language and the keyboard distribution.

Changing the input language.


On the login screen, click on the language button (top left corner of the screen)
and select the language "English (United States)".

Change the input language (only for the active window).


1 In the language bar, click on the button "Input language" and select the language "English
(United States)".
2 Next, click on the button "Keyboard distribution" and select the distribution "United
States".

1 2

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ220ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

10.8 Using the Fagor logo key.

Keys. Meaning.

+ [1] .. [0] Keys [F1] to [F10].

+ [–] Key [F11].

+ [=] Key [F12].

+ [S] Cancel or activate the keystroke sound. 10.


+ [T] Cancel or activate the touchpad (touch panel).

Using the Fagor logo key.


HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0 + TOUCHPAD.
+ [C] Change the function of the axis keys on the numeric keypad; write the name of
axis1 to axis6 / always write X, Y, Z, A, B, C.

+ [D] Minimize everything / Show the last active application.

+ [P] Print screen; can be combined with [SHIFT] and with [ALT].

+ [E] Open the Windows Explorer.

10.9 Numeric keypad.

Numeric keypad optimized to operate with the CNC (keys for axes, feedrate, speed, etc).
The second function of the keys is available with a long press of the key; the [SHIFT] key
is not necessary.

The behavior of the three axis keys can be modified with the [FAGOR]+[C] keys.
Option 1.

The keys write the name of the first


six axes of the channel.

+C
Option 2.
The keys always write the characters
X Y Z A B C.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ221ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

10.10 Touchpad (touch screen).

Left button.

10.
Right button,
Touchpad (touch screen).
HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0 + TOUCHPAD.

Primary button. Double click. Secondary button.

Tap lightly with one finger to Tap lightly twice with one finger Tap lightly with two fingers to
simulate a mouse click. to simulate the double click of a simulate the right click of a
mouse. mouse.

Move the cursor. Move screen (pan). Move screen (scroll).

Move a finger to move the Move two fingers to the left and Move two fingers up and down
cursor. right to move horizontally to move vertically (scroll).
(pan).

Zoom. Turn the page. Minimize the window.

Pinch or separate two fingers to Drag three fingers horizontally Drag three fingers downward
zoom in or out. to move forward or back a to minimize the active window.
page.

Start menu.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070
Drag three fingers upward to
access the start menu.
REF: 2305 The actions of touching with one or two fingers work in reverse if the mouse is configured
for left-handed people.

ꞏ222ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

11 HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0-A.

Model. Description.

HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0-A • USB horizontal, alphanumeric QWERTY keyboard.


• Multi-touch touchpad (touch panel).
• Numeric keypad optimized to operate with the CNC (keys for
axes, feedrate, speed, etc).
• Special functions with the Fagor key.
11.

HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0-A.


In the operating system, customize the keyboard arrangement as "English (United States)". See
i "11.7 Selecting the language and the keyboard distribution." on page 231.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ223ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

11.1 Specifications.

Type. Description.

General. • USB horizontal, alphanumeric QWERTY keyboard.


• Multi-touch touchpad (touch panel).
• Numeric keypad optimized to operate with the CNC (keys for axes, feedrate,
speed, etc).
• Special functions with the Fagor key.
• Keyboard distribution; "English (United States)".

11. • Dimensions (width x height x depth)


- 420 × 175 × 25 mm.
- 16.54" × 6.89" × 0.98".
HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0-A.
Specifications.

• Weight: 1.765 kg (3.90 lb)

Operating • Equipment for indoor use in non-hazardous locations, operated by qualified


conditions. personnel skilled in its use.
• The equipment must be installed in an enclosure that meets the requirements
described in this manual.
• Equipment designed for use in fixed locations.
• Equipment not suitable for wet areas.
• Never use in explosive environments (dangerous areas).

Regulations. • It complies with the European directives for electromagnetic compatibility


2014/30/EU and low voltage 2014/35/EU. See the declaration of conformity,
available on our website.
• UL 61010-1 (Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for
Me a s u r e m e n t , C o n t r o l , a n d L a b o r a t o r y U s e - Pa r t 1: G e n e r a l
Requirements). See the certificate, available on our website.
• IEC/UL 61010-2-201 (Safety requirements for elecrical equipement for
measurement, control and laboratory use. Particular requirements for
control equipment).
• Canadian Standards Associations: CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control
Equipement).

Packaging. • The package meets the regulation EN 60068-2-32 procedure 1 with a


random fall from a height not greater than 1 m.

Ambient. • Storage and transport temperature according to IEC 61131-2:


- Between -40 ºC (-40 ºF) and +70 ºC (158 ºF).
• Work temperature according to IEC 61131-2:
- Between 5 ºC (41 ºF) and 55 ºC (131 ºF).
• Temperature outside cabinet according to IEC 61131-2:
- Between 5 ºC (41 ºF) and 45 ºC (113 ºF).
• Temperature inside the enclosure:
- Less than 55 ºC (131 ºF).
• Relative humidity according to IEC 61131-2:
- 20 ~ 85% RH without condensation.
• Maximum work altitude:
- The unit must work properly at 2000 m according to IEC 61131-2.
• Vibration test according to IEC 60068-2-6 with a frequency step of
1 octave/minute (±10%) and a duration of 10 sweeps.
- 5 Hz  f  8.4 Hz; movement of constant 3.5 mm amplitude (peak value).
- 8.4 Hz  f  150 Hz; 1g acceleration and constant amplitude (peak value).
• Degree of protection according to EN 60529:
- IP65 (front).
• Pollution degree 2 according to IEC/UL 61010-1.

Power supply. • Power through the USB cable.


• Maximum consumption: 0.5 W.
CNCelite Connectivity. • Connection to the central unit through USB-B 2.0 (rear).
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ224ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

11.1.1 Conditions of acceptabity for NRTL certification.

• This equipment is for indoor use in non-hazardous locations, operated by qualified


personnel skilled in its use.
• The equipement shall be supplied with the specified rated voltages according to the
hardware manual.
• The nature of the installation where it is connected must not exceed OVC II.
• The equipment fullfils the requirements of the tested standars only if it is operated

11.
according to the hardware manual.
• The end application has to fulfill the requirements for resistance to mechanical stresses.
• To meet IP 54, the system must be installed in an appropiate enclosure according to the

HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0-A.


Specifications.
hardware manual.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ225ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

11.2 General diagram.

• Do not replace the cable supplied by Fagor.


• Do not connect any type of extension cord to the USB power cable.
• Connect the keyboard directly to the central unit; do not connect the keyboard to any type of hub.

CNC HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0-A

11.
HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0-A.
General diagram.

USB

CNC PPC-21W

ETHERNET

CAN USB

OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE-A HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0-A

Connection. Description.

USB Connection of a USB keyboard to the panel-PC. Use the keyboard cable.
Maximum cable length: 800 mm (2.62 ft).

Ethernet. Connecting the CNC to the panel-PC.


Maximum cable length: 100 m (328 ft).

CAN Connection of the operator panel.


Maximum length of bus; 500 m (1640 ft).
CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ226ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

11.3 Dimensions.

c a

Db b 11.

HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0-A.


Dimensions.
Da

mm inch mm inch

a 420 16.54 Da 388 15.28


b 175 6.89 Db 143 5.63

c 20 0.79

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ227ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

11.4 Enclosure and mounting of the module.

11.4.1 Enclosure design.

Before building an enclosure with glass fiber u another poor heat dissipating material, contact Fagor
i Automation.

The enclosure must meet the following requirements:

11.
• Protection degree: IP 54 minimun (according to EN 60529).
• Protection degree: IK 08 minimun (according to IEC 62262).
• Enclosures complying with UL 50 and/or UL 50E and CSA C22.2 Nos. 94.1 or 94.3 for
HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0-A.
Enclosure and mounting of the module.

the intended application, need not be subjected to the applicable requirements in this
standard. Non-metallic materials of enclosures complying with the above standards,
relied upon for containment of fire within the equipment, shall have a minimun
flammability rating of V-1.
• The enclosure must have enough surface area to evacuate by convection the heat
generated inside.
• The enclosure must respect the minimum distances recommended between the
enclosure walls and the central unit to let the air flow and improve heat dissipation.
• In the connector area, reserve a space that allows the cables to be connected, respecting
their radius of curvature.
• Keep the enclosure clean.

Dimensions of the cut off part and the enclosure.

e
k d

W G

H
R G
k

F F F

General tolerance for W and H = ±0.5 mm (0.02 inches). D


Tolerance for d = ±0.2 mm (0.0079 inches).
Maximum radius of the corners = 5 mm (0.2 inches).

mm inch mm inch

W 392 15.43 D (*) 65 2.56

H 147 5.79 e 1.5 - 4 0.06 - 0.16

F 135 5.31 (*) Minimum recommended distance.


G 80 3.15

CNCelite k 6.5 0.26

8058 8060 d Ø 4,8 Ø 0.19

8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ228ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

11.4.2 Securing the module.

The module must be installed in a proper enclosure that may be located on the machine or
on an external support. To insert the unit into the enclosure, it must have a big enough hole
to allow to insert it easily, without obstacles and without forcing the unit. See
"11.4.1 Enclosure design." on page 228.

The module is mounted from inside the enclosure. Once the unit has been inserted into the
enclosure, secure it from the inside using the screws provided for this purpose. Apply a
tightening torque of 2.1 Nm.

11.

HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0-A.


Enclosure and mounting of the module.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ229ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

11.5 Power supply for the module.

Power the module through the keyboard’s USB cable.

Rear view.

11.
HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0-A.
Power supply for the module.

USB power cable.

• Do not replace the cable supplied by Fagor.


• Do not connect any type of extension cord to the USB power cable.
• Connect the keyboard directly to the central unit; do not connect the keyboard to any type of hub.

Cable characteristics.

Characteristic. Description.

Type. USB cable, type A-B.


Shielded cable. 4-Wire cable in twisted pairs.

Characteristic impedance. 90  ± 15 %.
Length. 0.8 meters (0.03 inches).

Bending radius. Fixed installation: 5 x d (d=7 mm).


Flexible installation: 10 x d (d=7 mm).

Resistance to oils. Meets the DIN EN 60811-2-1 standard

Consumption.
Maximum consumption: 0.5 W.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ230ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

11.6 Connectors.

The connectors are in the rear.

Side view.

Ground connection.

11.

HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0-A.


Connectors.
11.7 Selecting the language and the keyboard distribution.

In the operating system, customize the input language and the keyboard distribution as
"English (United States)". The keyboard distribution controls the characters that appear on
screen when the keys are pressed. If the keyboard distribution is not assigned to this
language, it is possible that the characters on screen will not match the characters of the
keys.

In order to change the keyboard distribution, the desired input language and keyboard
distribution must be added to Windows.

Adding an input language and a keyboard distribution.


1 Click on the Start menu > Control panel > Regional and language configuration.
Depending on how Windows is configured, it may be necessary to first select "Clock,
language and region".

2 Click on the "Keyboards and languages" tab and then click on "Change keyboards".

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ231ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

3 In the "Installed services” section, click on the button "Add". Add the desired input
language and the keyboard distribution (in this case, English (United States)). Click on
"OK" to finish.

11.
HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0-A.
Selecting the language and the keyboard distribution.

Changing the input language.


On the login screen, click on the language button (top left corner of the screen)
and select the language "English (United States)".

Change the input language (only for the active window).


1 In the language bar, click on the button "Input language" and select the language "English
(United States)".
2 Next, click on the button "Keyboard distribution" and select the distribution "United
States".

1 2

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ232ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

11.8 Using the Fagor logo key.

Keys. Meaning.

+ [1] .. [0] Keys [F1] to [F10].

+ [–] Key [F11].

+ [=] Key [F12].

+ [S] Cancel or activate the keystroke sound. 11.


+ [T] Cancel or activate the touchpad (touch panel).

HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0-A.


Using the Fagor logo key.
+ [C] Change the function of the axis keys on the numeric keypad; write the name of
axis1 to axis6 / always write X, Y, Z, A, B, C.

+ [D] Minimize everything / Show the last active application.

+ [P] Print screen; can be combined with [SHIFT] and with [ALT].

+ [E] Open the Windows Explorer.

11.9 Numeric keypad.

Numeric keypad optimized to operate with the CNC (keys for axes, feedrate, speed, etc).
The second function of the keys is available with a long press of the key; the [SHIFT] key
is not necessary.

The behavior of the three axis keys can be modified with the [FAGOR]+[C] keys.
Option 1.

The keys write the name of the first


six axes of the channel.

+C
Option 2.
The keys always write the characters
X Y Z A B C.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ233ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

11.10 Touchpad (touch screen).

Left button.

11.
Right button,
HORIZONTAL KEYB 2.0-A.
Touchpad (touch screen).

Primary button. Double click. Secondary button.

Tap lightly with one finger to Tap lightly twice with one finger Tap lightly with two fingers to
simulate a mouse click. to simulate the double click of a simulate the right click of a
mouse. mouse.

Move the cursor. Move screen (pan). Move screen (scroll).

Move a finger to move the Move two fingers to the left and Move two fingers up and down
cursor. right to move horizontally to move vertically (scroll).
(pan).

Zoom. Turn the page. Minimize the window.

Pinch or separate two fingers Drag three fingers horizontally Drag three fingers downward
to zoom in or out. to move forward or back a to minimize the active window.
page.

Start menu.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070
Drag three fingers upward to
access the start menu.
REF: 2305 The actions of touching with one or two fingers work in reverse if the mouse is configured
for left-handed people.

ꞏ234ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

12 OP-PANEL-329.

The machine manufacturer must comply with the EN 60204-1 (IEC-204-1) regulation regarding
electrical shocks in case of defective input/output pins with external power supply when not plugging
the connector before turning the power supply on.

Module. Description.

12.
OP-PANEL-329 CAN operator panel 329 mm (12.95"), configurable jog key, speed
override key, CNC power-down key and 12 configurable user keys.
Possibility to connect up to three electronic handwheels.

OP-PANEL-329.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ235ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

12.1 Specifications.

Type. Description.

General. • Jog switch (0 - 200 %).


• 12 configurable user keys.
• 15 configurable jog keys.
• Speed override key.
• CNC power-down key.

12.
• Dimensions (width x height x depth)
- 329 × 175 × 20 mm.
- 12.95" × 6.89" × 0.78".
Operating • Equipment for indoor use in non-hazardous locations, operated by qualified
OP-PANEL-329.
Specifications.

conditions. personnel skilled in its use.


• The equipment must be installed in an enclosure that meets the requirements
described in this manual.
• Equipment designed for use in fixed locations.
• Equipment not suitable for wet areas.
• Never use in explosive environments (dangerous areas).

Regulations. • It complies with the European directives for electromagnetic compatibility


2014/30/EU and low voltage 2014/35/EU. See the declaration of conformity,
available on our website.
• UL 61010-1 (Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for
Me a s u r e m e n t , C o n t r o l , a n d L a b o r a t o r y U s e - Pa r t 1: G e n e r a l
Requirements). See the certificate, available on our website.
• IEC/UL 61010-2-201 (Safety requirements for elecrical equipement for
measurement, control and laboratory use. Particular requirements for
control equipment).
• Canadian Standards Associations: CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control
Equipement).

Packaging. • The package meets the regulation EN 60068-2-32 procedure 1 with a


random fall from a height not greater than 1 m.

Ambient. • Storage and transport temperature according to IEC 61131-2:


- Between -40 ºC (-40 ºF) and +70 ºC (158 ºF).
• Work temperature according to IEC 61131-2:
- Between 5 ºC (41 ºF) and 55 ºC (131 ºF).
• Temperature outside cabinet according to IEC 61131-2:
- Between 5 ºC (41 ºF) and 45 ºC (113 ºF).
• Temperature inside the enclosure:
- Less than 55 ºC (131 ºF).
• Relative humidity according to IEC 61131-2:
- 20 ~ 85% RH without condensation.
• Maximum work altitude:
- The unit must work properly at 2000 m according to IEC 61131-2.
• Vibration test according to IEC 60068-2-6 with a frequency step of
1 octave/minute (±10%) and a duration of 10 sweeps.
- 5 Hz  f  8.4 Hz; movement of constant 3.5 mm amplitude (peak value).
- 8.4 Hz  f  150 Hz; 1g acceleration and constant amplitude (peak value).
• Degree of protection according to EN 60529:
- IP65 (front).
• Pollution degree 2 according to IEC/UL 61010-1.

Electrical. • Connection to mains supply: Permanent.


• Operating conditions: Continuous.
• Protection against electric shock: Class III (PE connection is only for
functional earthing).
CNCelite • OVC I protection level according to IEC/UL 61010-1.

8058 8060 Power supply. • Use a regulated 24 V DC power supply (between -15% and +20%) and 2 A
(including voltage ripple and noise). The power supply must meet the
8065 8070 UL1950 standard.

Connectivity. • Connection to the central unit through CAN bus.


REF: 2305
• Three handwheels with A and B signals (5 V DC TTL).

ꞏ236ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

12.1.1 Conditions of acceptabity for NRTL certification.

• This equipment is for indoor use in non-hazardous locations, operated by qualified


personnel skilled in its use.
• The equipement shall be supplied with the specified rated voltages according to the
hardware manual.
• The nature of the installation where it is connected must not exceed OVC II.
• The equipment fullfils the requirements of the tested standars only if it is operated

12.
according to the hardware manual.
• The end application has to fulfill the requirements for resistance to mechanical stresses.
• To meet IP 54, the system must be installed in an appropiate enclosure according to the

OP-PANEL-329.
Specifications.
hardware manual.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ237ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

12.2 General diagram.

CNC OP-PANEL-329

CAN

12.
OP-PANEL-329.
General diagram.

CNC OP-PANEL-329

CAN

Connection. Description.

CAN Communication with CNC.


Maximum length: 500 m (1640 ft) for the CANopen bus.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ238ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

12.3 Dimensions.

d
c a

12.
b

OP-PANEL-329.
Dimensions.
Db

Da

mm inch mm inch

a 329 12.95 Da 296 11.65


b 175 6.89 Db 142 5.59

c 20 0.78

d 38 1.49

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ239ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

12.4 Enclosure and mounting of the module.

12.4.1 Ambient characteristics of the enclosure.

The enclosure must be designed to ensure an ambient temperature of 45 ºC (113 ºF) and
while the unit is running, the inside temperature of the CNC must not exceed 60 ºC (140 ºF).

12. 12.4.2 Enclosure design.


OP-PANEL-329.
Enclosure and mounting of the module.

Before building an enclosure with glass fiber u another poor heat dissipating material, contact Fagor
i Automation.

The enclosure must meet the following requirements:


• Protection degree: IP 54 minimun (according to EN 60529).
• Protection degree: IK 08 minimun (according to IEC 62262).
• Enclosures complying with UL 50 and/or UL 50E and CSA C22.2 Nos. 94.1 or 94.3 for
the intended application, need not be subjected to the applicable requirements in this
standard. Non-metallic materials of enclosures complying with the above standards,
relied upon for containment of fire within the equipment, shall have a minimun
flammability rating of V-1.
• The enclosure must have enough surface area to evacuate by convection the heat
generated inside.
• The enclosure must respect the minimum distances recommended between the
enclosure walls and the central unit to let the air flow and improve heat dissipation.
• In the connector area, reserve a space that allows the cables to be connected, respecting
their radius of curvature.
• Keep the enclosure clean.

Dimensions of the cut off part and the enclosure.

CNCelite mm inch mm inch


8058 8060 W 298 11.73 D 78 3.07
8065 8070
H 144 5.66 e 1.5 - 4 0.06 - 0.16

REF: 2305

ꞏ240ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

12.4.3 Securing the module.

The module must be installed in a proper enclosure that may be located on the machine or
on an external support. To insert the unit into the enclosure, it must have a big enough hole
to allow to insert it easily, without obstacles and without forcing the unit. See "12.4.1 Ambient
characteristics of the enclosure." on page 240.

The module is mounted from inside the enclosure. Once the unit has been inserted into the
enclosure, secure it from the inside with the tension jacks. To properly secure it, use all the
tension jacks on the back of the unit. Apply a tightening torque of 0.7 Nm.

12.

OP-PANEL-329.
Enclosure and mounting of the module.
1 2

0.7 Nm

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ241ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

12.5 Power supply for the module.

• Use a regulated 24 V DC power supply.


• The unit must be powered with class DVC A power supply with a SELV/PELV protection
output voltage.
• For all connections and terminals of electronic modules, use only power supplies that
provide SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) or PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage) output
voltages.

12. 24 V DC universal power supply, via Phoenix


connector. See "24 V DC voltage supply." on page 244.
OP-PANEL-329.
Power supply for the module.

24 V DC

Connector pinout.
Plug-in part. 3-pole Phoenix-type combicon connector (7.62 mm
pitch).

Pin Signal. Function.


1 Chassis.

2 GND 0 V reference signal.


3 +24 V Power supply.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ242ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

12.6 Hardware functionalities.

12.6.1 Ground connection.

It is up to the system integrator to meet all the requirements of local and national electrical codes as
well as all the regulations applicable regarding the grounding of the whole unit.

Ground connection.
12.

Hardware functionalities.
OP-PANEL-329.
12.6.2 Rear connectors.

H F

E
G
D
C

A B

(A) 24 V DC voltage supply.


(B) Handwheels.
(C) B28A / B28B CAN bus.
(D) S42 Bus switch and transmission speed.
(E) S41 Address (node) of the element.
(F) S43 Line terminating resistor.
(G) D46 ERR led, transmission status indicator.
(H) D45 RUN led, module status indicator.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ243ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

24 V DC voltage supply.
Plug-in part. 3-pole Phoenix-type combicon connector (7.62 mm
pitch).

Pin Signal. Function.


1 Chassis.

2 GND 0 V reference signal.


3 +24 V Power supply.

12. Connector data.


Number of poles.
Pitch.
3.
7.62 mm.
Connection technique. Screw connection.
Hardware functionalities.
OP-PANEL-329.

Minimum/maximum tightening torque. 0.5 / 0.6 Nm.


Minimum/maximum section. 0.2 / 2.5 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 24 / 12.
Rated current In. 12 A.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped. 7 mm.

See "12.5 Power supply for the module." on page 242.

Handwheel connection.
Plug-in part. 10-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector
(3.5 mm pitch).

Pin. Signal. Function.


1 +5 V 5 V DC voltage supply.
2 --- ---
3 --- ---
4 MPG3-B B signal of the third handwheel.
5 MPG3-A A signal of the third handwheel.
6 MPG2-B B signal of the second handwheel.
7 MPG2-A A signal of the second handwheel.
8 MPG1-B B signal of the first handwheel.
9 MPG1-A A signal of the first handwheel.
10 GND Power supply.

Connector data.
Number of poles. 10.
Pitch. 3.5 mm.
Connection technique. Spring connection.
Minimum/maximum section. 0.2 / 1.5 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 24 / 16.
Rated current In. 8 A.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped. 7 mm.

Cable shields must be connected to the ground plate. See "12.7 Handwheel connection." on page 247.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ244ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

ꞏB28A / B28Bꞏ CAN bus.


Plug-in part. 5-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm
pitch).

Pin. Signal. Function.


1 GND Ground / 0 V.
2 CL (LOW) bus signal.
3 SH CAN shield.
4 CH (HIGH) bus signal.
5 SH Not being used.

Connector data.
Number of poles. 5.
12.
Pitch. 3.5 mm.

Hardware functionalities.
OP-PANEL-329.
Connection technique. Screw connection.
Minimum/maximum tightening torque. 0.22 / 0.25 Nm.
Minimum/maximum section. 0.14 / 1.5 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 28 / 16.
Rated current In. 8 A.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped. 7 mm.

See "12.8 Bus CAN (CANopen protocol)." on page 248.

ꞏS42ꞏ CAN bus. CAN bus type selection (CANopen).


Switch ꞏ1ꞏ of the DIP switch selects the type of CAN bus.
DS ꞏ1ꞏ Type of CAN bus.
off Not being used.
on CANopen bus.

ꞏS42ꞏ CAN bus. Selecting the speed for the CANopen bus.
When using the CANopen protocol, the transmission speed at
the bus is defined in each node and they all must run at the
same speed. The speed is selected with switches ꞏ2ꞏ and ꞏ3ꞏ
of the DIP switch and it depends on the total length of the bus.
Using the following illustrative values; assigning other values
may cause communication errors due to signal distortion.
DS ꞏ2ꞏ DSꞏ3ꞏ Speed. Length of the CAN bus.
on on 1000 kHz Up to 20 meters.
off on 800 kHz From 20 to 40 meters.
on off 500 kHz From 40 to 100 meters.
off off 250 kHz From 100 to 500 meters.

S42ꞏ CAN bus. Address (node) of the element within the bus (16-31).
Switch ꞏ4ꞏ of the DIP switch selects the positions or elements
integrated in the CAN bus may be expanded up to 32.
DS ꞏ4ꞏ Address (node) of the element. CNCelite
off Positions 0-15 within the bus.
on Positions 16-31 within the bus. 8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ245ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

ꞏS41ꞏ CAN bus. Address (node) of the element within the bus (0-15).
Each one of the elements integrated into the CAN bus is identified
by the 16-position rotary switch (0-15) "Address" (also referred to
as "Node_Select"). The CNC must always occupy position "0" and
the rest of the elements of the bus will occupy consecutive
positions starting with "1".

The "Address" switch also sets the priority of the node within the bus; the lower the number
the higher the priority. We recommend the keyboard and jog panel to be the last nodes of

12. the bus.


Hardware functionalities.
OP-PANEL-329.

ꞏS43ꞏ CAN bus. Line terminating resistor.


The ꞏS43ꞏ switch identifies which are the elements that occupy
the ends of the CAN bus; that is, the first and last physical
element in the connection. The terminating elements must
have the resistor activated (position 1) but not the rest of the
elements (position 0).

ꞏD45ꞏ RUN led. Module status.


Green LED. The meaning depends on the blinking frequency.
Blinking rate. Description.
Intermittent. Module in PRE-OPERATIONAL state.
Single blinking. Module in STOPPED state.
On. Module in OPERATIONAL state.

ꞏD46ꞏ ERR led. Transmission status.


Red LED. The meaning depends on the blinking frequency.
Blinking rate. Description.
Off. The module is ready to run.
Intermittent. Module configuration stage.
Single blinking. Poor transmission. At least one of the error
counters of the CAN controller has reached
the alarm level.
Double blinking. There is no communication with the cpu.
On Error. The CAN controller is in "Bus Off"
state.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ246ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

12.7 Handwheel connection.

The keyboard admits the connection of up to 3 handwheels (MPG1, MPG2 and MPG3) with
A and B signals (5 V DC TTL). If he handwheel has an axis selector button, the button signal
may be connected to a digital input and may be managed from the PLC using the
NEXTMPGAXIS mark.

Connector pinout.
Plug-in part. 10-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector
(3.5 mm pitch).
12.

OP-PANEL-329.
Handwheel connection.
Pin. Signal. Function.
1 +5 V 5 V DC voltage supply.
2 --- ---
3 --- ---
4 MPG3-B B signal of the third handwheel.
5 MPG3-A A signal of the third handwheel.
6 MPG2-B B signal of the second handwheel.
7 MPG2-A A signal of the second handwheel.
8 MPG1-B B signal of the first handwheel.
9 MPG1-A A signal of the first handwheel.
10 GND Power supply.

Cable characteristics.
The cable being used must have overall shield. The unshielded portion of the wires of an
unshielded cable cannot be longer than 75 mm.

Connection.
We recommend to run the handwheel cable as far away as possible from the power cables
of the machine.

Always connect the shield of the cable to the ground plate using a metallic clamp.

Handwheel cable.

Cable shield.

CNCelite
Ground plate. 8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ247ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

12.8 Bus CAN (CANopen protocol).

CANopen is a network communication protocol based on the CAN bus, for connecting the
CNC with remote modules and keyboards. The CAN connection supports up to 32 devices
(nodes), including the central unit; more one than keyboard and several groups of remote
modules are possible.

CAN connector.
12. Plug-in part. 5-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm
pitch).

Pin. Signal. Function.


OP-PANEL-329.
Bus CAN (CANopen protocol).

1 GND Ground / 0 V.
2 CL (LOW) bus signal.
3 SH CAN shield.
4 CH (HIGH) bus signal.
5 SH Not being used.

The cable shield must be connected to the connector at both ends. The connector has two
shield pins. Both pins are equivalent and the CAN shield may be connected to either one.

CAN cable characteristics.


Use a specific CAN cable. The ends of all the wires and the shield must be protected by the
corresponding terminal (pin). Also use the terminals (pins) to secure the cable to the
connector.

General characteristics.

Type. Shielded. Twisted pair (1 x 2 x 0.22 mm²).

Flexibility. Extremely flexible. Minimum bending radius, static = 50 mm and


dynamic = 95 mm.

Cover. PUR

Impedance. Cat.5 (100 - 120)

Module interconnection.
Respect the cable's minimum bending radius when connecting it. They must be connected
in series; on elements having two CAN connectors, either one may be used. Once the
elements have been connected, define their logic order in the bus and the transmission
speed.

CNC JOG PANEL MODULE 1 MODULE 2

BCD B CD BCD BCD

ADDRESS = 0 ADDRESS = 3 ADDRESS = 1 ADDRESS = 2


F0 1

F0 1

F0 1

F0 1
78 9

78 9

78 9

78 9

3 45 34 5 34 5 34 5

ADD MSB = 0 ADD MSB = 0


Line Term = 1 Line Term = 0 Line Term = 0 Line Term = 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

X2 X2 X2
ISO GND ISO GND ISO GND ISO GND
CAN L CAN L CAN L CAN L
CNCelite SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD

8058 8060 CAN H


SHIELD
CAN H
SHIELD
CAN H
SHIELD
CAN H
SHIELD

8065 8070
X3 X3 X3
ISO GND ISO GND ISO GND
CAN L CAN L CAN L
REF: 2305 SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD
CAN H CAN H CAN H
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD

The drawing shows the CAN connection between the CPU (central unit), the operator panel and 2
groups of RIOR or RIO5 series remote modules.

ꞏ248ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

12.8.1 Identification of the modules at the bus.

Each one of the elements integrated into the CAN bus is identified by its address or node
number. The CNC must always occupy position "0" and the rest of the elements of the bus
will occupy consecutive positions starting with "1". The node address or number also sets
the priority of the group within the bus; the lower the number the higher the priority. We
recommend to set the priority of the groups as follows (from highest to lowest).
• The groups that have the feedback inputs.
• The groups that have analog inputs and outputs.
• The groups that have digital inputs and outputs.
• The keyboard and jog panel.
12.

OP-PANEL-329.
Bus CAN (CANopen protocol).
In order for any change in the identification of the module to take effect, the CNC must be
restarted and turn off/on the corresponding module; however, we recommend to change the
address while the modules and the CNC are off.

Configuring the address (node number).

ꞏS41ꞏ Address (node) of the element within the bus (0-15).


Each one of the elements integrated into the CAN bus is
identified by the 16-position rotary switch (0-15) "Address"
(also referred to as "Node_Select").

ꞏS42ꞏ Address (node) of the element within the bus (16-31).

With the ꞏ4ꞏ switch of the DIP switch, the positions or elements integrated in the CAN bus
may be expanded up to 32.
DS ꞏ4ꞏ Address (node) of the element.
off Positions 0-15 within the bus.
on Positions 16-31 within the bus.

ADDRESS = 2 ADDRESS = 18
BCD BCD
89 A

89 A
EF 2

EF 2

ADDRESS = 2 ADDRESS = 2
01

01
67

67

34 5 345

ID4 = 0 ID4 = 1
ID3 ID3
ID2 ID2
ID1 ID1
ON ON

ADDRESS 0 1 2 3 ꞏꞏꞏ 13 14 15

DS4 = 0 0 1 2 3 ꞏꞏꞏ 13 14 15

DS4 = 1 16 17 18 19 ꞏꞏꞏ 29 30 31

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ249ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

12.8.2 Identification of the first and last elements of the bus.

In the CAN bus, it is necessary to use a line terminating resistor to identify which are the
elements that occupy the ends of the bus; i.e. the first and last physical element in the
connection. For the central unit, the terminating resistor is factory installed because the CNC
is always at one end of the bus.
In the other elements, the S43 switch identifies which are the
elements that occupy the ends of the CAN bus; that is, the first
and last physical element in the connection. The terminating

12. elements must have the resistor activated (position 1) but not
the rest of the elements (position 0).
OP-PANEL-329.
Bus CAN (CANopen protocol).

12.8.3 CAN bus type selection (CANopen).

Switch ꞏ1ꞏ of the DIP switch selects the type of CAN bus.
DS ꞏ1ꞏ Type of CAN bus.
off Not being used.
on CANopen bus.

12.8.4 Selecting the speed for the CANopen bus.

When using the CANopen protocol, the transmission speed at the bus is defined in each node
and they all must run at the same speed. The speed is selected with switches ꞏ2ꞏ and ꞏ3ꞏ
of the DIP switch and it depends on the total length of the bus. Using the following illustrative
values; assigning other values may cause communication errors due to signal distortion.
DS ꞏ2ꞏ DSꞏ3ꞏ Speed Length of the CAN bus.
on on 1000 kHz Up to 20 meters.
off on 800 kHz From 20 to 40 meters.
on off 500 kHz From 40 to 100 meters.
off off 250 kHz From 100 to 500 meters.

The speed of 250 kHz is only available to communicate with the keyboards, RIOW and RIOW
series remote modules; this speed is not available at the RIO5 series remote modules.

In order for any change of speed to be assumed, the corresponding module must be reset;
however, we recommend to change the speed while the modules and the CNC are off.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ250ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

13 OP-PANEL / OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE.

The machine manufacturer must comply with the EN 60204-1 (IEC-204-1) regulation regarding
electrical shocks in case of defective input/output pins with external power supply when not plugging
the connector before turning the power supply on.

Module. Description.

13.
OP-PANEL CAN operator panel 420 mm (16.54") with spindle override.
Possibility to connect up to three electronic handwheels.

OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE CAN Operator panel 420 mm (16.54") with spindle override switch.

OP-PANEL / OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE.


Possibility to connect up to three electronic handwheels.

OP-PANEL

OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ251ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

13.1 Specifications.

Type. Description.

General. • Jog switch (0 - 200 %).


• 16 configurable user keys.
• 15 configurable jog keys.
• Speed override key (OP-PANEL).
• Speed override switch (OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE).

13.
• CNC power-down key.
• Dimensions (width x height x depth)
- 420 × 175 × 54.5 mm.
- 16.54" × 6.89" × 2.15".
OP-PANEL / OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE.
Specifications.

Operating • Equipment for indoor use in non-hazardous locations, operated by qualified


conditions. personnel skilled in its use.
• The equipment must be installed in an enclosure that meets the requirements
described in this manual.
• Equipment designed for use in fixed locations.
• Equipment not suitable for wet areas.
• Never use in explosive environments (dangerous areas).

Regulations. • It complies with the European directives for electromagnetic compatibility


2014/30/EU and low voltage 2014/35/EU. See the declaration of conformity,
available on our website.
• UL 61010-1 (Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for
Me a s u r e m e n t , C o n t r o l , a n d L a b o r a t o r y U s e - Pa r t 1: G e n e r a l
Requirements). See the certificate, available on our website.
• IEC/UL 61010-2-201 (Safety requirements for elecrical equipement for
measurement, control and laboratory use. Particular requirements for
control equipment).
• Canadian Standards Associations: CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control
Equipement).

Packaging. • The package meets the regulation EN 60068-2-32 procedure 1 with a


random fall from a height not greater than 1 m.

Ambient. • Storage and transport temperature according to IEC 61131-2:


- Between -40 ºC (-40 ºF) and +70 ºC (158 ºF).
• Work temperature according to IEC 61131-2:
- Between 5 ºC (41 ºF) and 55 ºC (131 ºF).
• Temperature outside cabinet according to IEC 61131-2:
- Between 5 ºC (41 ºF) and 45 ºC (113 ºF).
• Temperature inside the enclosure:
- Less than 55 ºC (131 ºF).
• Relative humidity according to IEC 61131-2:
- 20 ~ 85% RH without condensation.
• Maximum work altitude:
- The unit must work properly at 2000 m according to IEC 61131-2.
• Vibration test according to IEC 60068-2-6 with a frequency step of
1 octave/minute (±10%) and a duration of 10 sweeps.
- 5 Hz  f  8.4 Hz; movement of constant 3.5 mm amplitude (peak value).
- 8.4 Hz  f  150 Hz; 1g acceleration and constant amplitude (peak value).
• Degree of protection according to EN 60529:
- IP65 (front).
• Pollution degree 2 according to IEC/UL 61010-1.
Electrical. • Connection to mains supply: Permanent.
• Operating conditions: Continuous.
• Protection against electric shock: Class III (PE connection is only for
CNCelite functional earthing).
• OVC I protection level according to IEC/UL 61010-1.
8058 8060
Power supply. • Use a regulated 24 V DC power supply (between -15% and +20%) and 2 A
8065 8070 (including voltage ripple and noise). The power supply must meet the
UL1950 standard.

REF: 2305
Connectivity. • Connecting the central unit via CAN bus.
• Three handwheels with A and B signals (5 V DC TTL).

ꞏ252ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

13.1.1 Conditions of acceptabity for NRTL certification.

• This equipment is for indoor use in non-hazardous locations, operated by qualified


personnel skilled in its use.
• The equipement shall be supplied with the specified rated voltages according to the
hardware manual.
• The nature of the installation where it is connected must not exceed OVC II.
• The equipment fullfils the requirements of the tested standars only if it is operated

13.
according to the hardware manual.
• The end application has to fulfill the requirements for resistance to mechanical stresses.
• To meet IP 54, the system must be installed in an appropiate enclosure according to the

OP-PANEL / OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE.


Specifications.
hardware manual.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ253ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

13.2 General diagram.

CNC OP-PANEL
OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE

CAN

13.
OP-PANEL / OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE.
General diagram.

CNC OP PANEL
OP PANEL+SPDL RATE

CAN

Connection. Description.

CAN Communication with CNC.


Maximum length: 500 m (1640 ft).

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ254ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

13.3 Dimensions.

d
c a

Db b 13.

OP-PANEL / OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE.


Dimensions.
Da

mm inch mm inch

a 420 16.54 Da 388 15.28


b 175 6.89 Db 143 5.63

c 24 0.94

d 54.5 2.15

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ255ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

13.4 Enclosure and mounting of the module.

13.4.1 Ambient characteristics of the enclosure.

The enclosure must be designed to ensure an ambient temperature of 45 ºC (113 ºF) and
while the unit is running, the inside temperature of the CNC must not exceed 60 ºC (140 ºF).

13. 13.4.2 Enclosure design.


OP-PANEL / OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE.
Enclosure and mounting of the module.

Before building an enclosure with glass fiber u another poor heat dissipating material, contact Fagor
i Automation.

The enclosure must meet the following requirements:


• Protection degree: IP 54 minimun (according to EN 60529).
• Protection degree: IK 08 minimun (according to IEC 62262).
• Enclosures complying with UL 50 and/or UL 50E and CSA C22.2 Nos. 94.1 or 94.3 for
the intended application, need not be subjected to the applicable requirements in this
standard. Non-metallic materials of enclosures complying with the above standards,
relied upon for containment of fire within the equipment, shall have a minimun
flammability rating of V-1.
• The enclosure must have enough surface area to evacuate by convection the heat
generated inside.
• The enclosure must respect the minimum distances recommended between the
enclosure walls and the central unit to let the air flow and improve heat dissipation.
• In the connector area, reserve a space that allows the cables to be connected, respecting
their radius of curvature.
• Keep the enclosure clean.

Dimensions of the cut off part and the enclosure.

mm inch mm inch
CNCelite W 392 15.43 D 74 2.91
8058 8060 H 147 5.79 e 1.5 - 4 0.06 - 0.16
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ256ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

13.4.3 Securing the module.

The module must be installed in a proper enclosure that may be located on the machine or
on an external support. To insert the unit into the enclosure, it must have a big enough hole
to allow to insert it easily, without obstacles and without forcing the unit. See "13.4.1 Ambient
characteristics of the enclosure." on page 256.

The module is mounted from inside the enclosure. Once the unit has been inserted into the
enclosure, secure it from the inside with the tension jacks. To properly secure it, use all the
tension jacks on the back of the unit. Apply a tightening torque of 0.7 Nm.

13.

OP-PANEL / OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE.


Enclosure and mounting of the module.
1 2

0.7 Nm

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ257ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

13.5 Power supply for the module.

• Use a regulated 24 V DC power supply.


• The unit must be powered with class DVC A power supply with a SELV/PELV protection
output voltage.
• For all connections and terminals of electronic modules, use only power supplies that
provide SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) or PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage) output
voltages.

13. 24 V DC universal power supply, via Phoenix


connector. See "24 V DC voltage supply." on page 260.
OP-PANEL / OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE.
Power supply for the module.

24 V DC

Connector pinout.
Plug-in part. 3-pole Phoenix-type combicon connector (7.62 mm
pitch).

Pin Signal. Function.


1 Chassis.

2 GND 0 V reference signal.


1
3 +24 V Power supply.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ258ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

13.6 Hardware functionalities.

13.6.1 Ground connection.

It is up to the system integrator to meet all the requirements of local and national electrical codes as
well as all the regulations applicable regarding the grounding of the whole unit.

Ground connection.
13.

OP-PANEL / OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE.


Hardware functionalities.
13.6.2 Rear connectors.

H G
C C
F

D
E

B
A

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070
(A) 24 V DC voltage supply.
(B) Handwheels.
(C) CAN bus.
REF: 2305
(D) Bus switch and transmission speed.
(E) Address (node) of the element.
(F) Line terminating resistor.
(G) ERR led, transmission status indicator.
(H) RUN led, module status indicator.

ꞏ259ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

24 V DC voltage supply.
Plug-in part. 3-pole Phoenix-type combicon connector (7.62 mm
pitch).

Pin Signal. Function.


1 Chassis.

2 GND 0 V reference signal.


1
3 +24 V Power supply.

13. Connector data.


Number of poles.
Pitch.
3.
7.62 mm.
Connection technique. Screw connection.
OP-PANEL / OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE.
Hardware functionalities.

Minimum/maximum tightening torque. 0.5 / 0.6 Nm.


Minimum/maximum section. 0.2 / 2.5 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 24 / 12.
Rated current In. 12 A.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped. 7 mm.

See "13.5 Power supply for the module." on page 258.

Handwheel connection.
Plug-in part. 10-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector
(3.5 mm pitch).

Pin. Signal. Function.


1 +5 VC 5 V DC voltage supply.
2 I1 ---
3 I2 ---
4 I3 B signal of the third handwheel.
5 I4 A signal of the third handwheel.
6 I5 B signal of the second handwheel.
7 I6 A signal of the second handwheel.
8 I7 B signal of the first handwheel.
9 I8 A signal of the first handwheel.
10 GNDC Power supply.

Connector data.
Number of poles. 10.
Pitch. 3.5 mm.
Connection technique. Spring connection.
Minimum/maximum section. 0.2 / 1.5 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 24 / 16.
Rated current In. 8 A.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped. 7 mm.

Cable shields must be connected to the ground plate. See "13.7 Handwheel connection." on page 263.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ260ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

CAN bus.
Plug-in part. 5-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm
pitch).

Pin. Signal. Function.


1 GND Ground / 0 V.
2 CL (LOW) bus signal.
3 SH CAN shield.
4 CH (HIGH) bus signal.
5 SH Not being used.

Connector data.
Number of poles. 5.
13.
Pitch. 3.5 mm.

OP-PANEL / OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE.


Hardware functionalities.
Connection technique. Screw connection.
Minimum/maximum tightening torque. 0.22 / 0.25 Nm.
Minimum/maximum section. 0.14 / 1.5 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 28 / 16.
Rated current In. 8 A.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped. 7 mm.

See "13.8 Bus CAN (CANopen protocol)." on page 264.

CAN bus. CAN bus type selection (CANopen).


Switch ꞏ1ꞏ of the DIP switch selects the type of CAN bus.
DS ꞏ1ꞏ Type of CAN bus.
off Not being used.
on CANopen bus.

CAN bus. Selecting the speed for the CANopen bus.


When using the CANopen protocol, the transmission speed at
the bus is defined in each node and they all must run at the
same speed. The speed is selected with switches ꞏ2ꞏ and ꞏ3ꞏ
of the DIP switch and it depends on the total length of the bus.
Using the following illustrative values; assigning other values
may cause communication errors due to signal distortion.
DS ꞏ2ꞏ DSꞏ3ꞏ Speed. Length of the CAN bus.
on on 1000 kHz Up to 20 meters.
off on 800 kHz From 20 to 40 meters.
on off 500 kHz From 40 to 100 meters.
off off 250 kHz From 100 to 500 meters.

CAN bus. Address (node) of the element within the bus (16-31).
Switch ꞏ4ꞏ of the DIP switch selects the positions or elements
integrated in the CAN bus may be expanded up to 32.
DS ꞏ4ꞏ Address (node) of the element. CNCelite
off Positions 0-15 within the bus.
on Positions 16-31 within the bus.
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ261ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

CAN bus. Address (node) of the element within the bus (0-15).
Each one of the elements integrated into the CAN bus is
identified by the 16-position rotary switch (0-15) "Address"
(also referred to as "Node_Select"). The CNC must always
occupy position "0" and the rest of the elements of the bus will
occupy consecutive positions starting with "1".

13. The "Address" switch also sets the priority of the node within the bus; the lower the number
the higher the priority. We recommend the keyboard and jog panel to be the last nodes of
the bus.
OP-PANEL / OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE.
Hardware functionalities.

CAN bus. Line terminating resistor (ꞏLTꞏ selector).


The ꞏLTꞏ switch identifies which are the elements that occupy
the ends of the CAN bus; that is, the first and last physical
element in the connection. The terminating elements must
have the resistor activated (position 1) but not the rest of the
elements (position 0).

RUN led. Module status.


Green Led. The meaning depends on the blinking frequency.
Blinking rate. Description.
Intermittent. Module in PRE-OPERATIONAL state.
Single blinking. Module in STOPPED state.
On. Module in OPERATIONAL state.

ERR led. Transmission status.


Red LED. The meaning depends on the blinking frequency.
Blinking rate. Description.
Off. The module is ready to run.
Intermittent. Module configuration stage.
Single blinking. Poor transmission. At least one of the error
counters of the CAN controller has reached
the alarm level.
Double blinking. There is no communication with the cpu.
On Error. The CAN controller is in "Bus Off"
state.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ262ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

13.7 Handwheel connection.

The keyboard admits the connection of up to 3 handwheels (MPG1, MPG2 and MPG3) with
A and B signals (5 V DC TTL). If he handwheel has an axis selector button, the button signal
may be connected to a digital input and may be managed from the PLC using the
NEXTMPGAXIS mark.

Connector pinout.
Plug-in part. 10-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector
(3.5 mm pitch).
13.

OP-PANEL / OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE.


Handwheel connection.
Pin. Signal. Function.
1 +5 VC 5 V DC voltage supply.
2 I1 ---
3 I2 ---
4 I3 B signal of the third handwheel.
5 I4 A signal of the third handwheel.
6 I5 B signal of the second handwheel.
7 I6 A signal of the second handwheel.
8 I7 B signal of the first handwheel.
9 I8 A signal of the first handwheel.
10 GNDC Power supply.

Cable characteristics.
The cable being used must have overall shield. The unshielded portion of the wires of an
unshielded cable cannot be longer than 75 mm.

Connection.
We recommend to run the handwheel cable as far away as possible from the power cables
of the machine.

Always connect the shield of the cable to the ground plate using a metallic clamp.

Handwheel cable.

Cable shield.

Ground plate.
CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ263ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

13.8 Bus CAN (CANopen protocol).

CANopen is a network communication protocol based on the CAN bus, for connecting the
CNC with remote modules and keyboards. The CAN connection supports up to 32 devices
(nodes), including the central unit; more one than keyboard and several groups of remote
modules are possible.

CAN connector.
13. Plug-in part. 5-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm
pitch).

Pin. Signal. Function.


OP-PANEL / OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE.
Bus CAN (CANopen protocol).

1 GND Ground / 0 V.
2 CL (LOW) bus signal.
3 SH CAN shield.
4 CH (HIGH) bus signal.
5 SH Not being used.

The cable shield must be connected to the connector at both ends. The connector has two
shield pins. Both pins are equivalent and the CAN shield may be connected to either one.

CAN cable characteristics.


Use a specific CAN cable. The ends of all the wires and the shield must be protected by the
corresponding terminal (pin). Also use the terminals (pins) to secure the cable to the
connector.

General characteristics.

Type. Shielded. Twisted pair (1 x 2 x 0.22 mm²).

Flexibility. Extremely flexible. Minimum bending radius, static = 50 mm and


dynamic = 95 mm.

Cover. PUR

Impedance. Cat.5 (100 - 120)

Module interconnection.
Respect the cable's minimum bending radius when connecting it. They must be connected
in series; on elements having two CAN connectors, either one may be used. Once the
elements have been connected, define their logic order in the bus and the transmission
speed.

CNC JOG PANEL MODULE 1 MODULE 2

BCD B CD BCD BCD

ADDRESS = 0 ADDRESS = 3 ADDRESS = 1 ADDRESS = 2


F0 1

F0 1

F0 1

F0 1
78 9

78 9

78 9

78 9

3 45 34 5 34 5 34 5

ADD MSB = 0 ADD MSB = 0


Line Term = 1 Line Term = 0 Line Term = 0 Line Term = 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

X2 X2 X2
ISO GND ISO GND ISO GND ISO GND
CAN L CAN L CAN L CAN L
CNCelite SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD

8058 8060 CAN H


SHIELD
CAN H
SHIELD
CAN H
SHIELD
CAN H
SHIELD

8065 8070
X3 X3 X3
ISO GND ISO GND ISO GND
CAN L CAN L CAN L
REF: 2305 SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD
CAN H CAN H CAN H
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD

The drawing shows the CAN connection between the CPU (central unit), the operator panel and 2
groups of RIOR or RIO5 series remote modules.

ꞏ264ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

13.8.1 Identification of the modules at the bus.

Each one of the elements integrated into the CAN bus is identified by its address or node
number. The CNC must always occupy position "0" and the rest of the elements of the bus
will occupy consecutive positions starting with "1". The node address or number also sets
the priority of the group within the bus; the lower the number the higher the priority. We
recommend to set the priority of the groups as follows (from highest to lowest).
• The groups that have the feedback inputs.
• The groups that have analog inputs and outputs.
• The groups that have digital inputs and outputs.
• The keyboard and jog panel.
13.

OP-PANEL / OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE.


Bus CAN (CANopen protocol).
In order for any change in the identification of the module to take effect, the CNC must be
restarted and turn off/on the corresponding module; however, we recommend to change the
address while the modules and the CNC are off.

Configuring the address (node number).

Address (node) of the element within the bus (0-15).


Each one of the elements integrated into the CAN bus is
identified by the 16-position rotary switch (0-15) "Address"
(also referred to as "Node_Select").

Address (node) of the element within the bus (16-31).

With the ꞏ4ꞏ switch of the DIP switch, the positions or elements integrated in the CAN bus
may be expanded up to 32.
DS ꞏ4ꞏ Address (node) of the element.
off Positions 0-15 within the bus.
on Positions 16-31 within the bus.

ADDRESS = 2 ADDRESS = 18
BCD BCD
89 A

89 A
EF 2

EF 2

ADDRESS = 2 ADDRESS = 2
01

01
67

67

34 5 345

ID4 = 0 ID4 = 1
ID3 ID3
ID2 ID2
ID1 ID1
ON ON

ADDRESS 0 1 2 3 ꞏꞏꞏ 13 14 15

DS4 = 0 0 1 2 3 ꞏꞏꞏ 13 14 15

DS4 = 1 16 17 18 19 ꞏꞏꞏ 29 30 31
CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ265ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

13.8.2 Identification of the first and last elements of the bus.

In the CAN bus, it is necessary to use a line terminating resistor to identify which are the
elements that occupy the ends of the bus; i.e. the first and last physical element in the
connection. For the central unit, the terminating resistor is factory installed because the CNC
is always at one end of the bus
In the other elements, the ꞏLTꞏ switch identifies which are the
elements that occupy the ends of the CAN bus; that is, the first
and last physical element in the connection. The terminating

13. elements must have the resistor activated (position 1) but not
the rest of the elements (position 0).
OP-PANEL / OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE.
Bus CAN (CANopen protocol).

13.8.3 CAN bus type selection (CANopen).

Switch ꞏ1ꞏ of the DIP switch selects the type of CAN bus.
DS ꞏ1ꞏ Type of CAN bus.
off Not being used.
on CANopen bus.

13.8.4 Selecting the speed for the CANopen bus.

When using the CANopen protocol, the transmission speed at the bus is defined in each node
and they all must run at the same speed. The speed is selected with switches ꞏ2ꞏ and ꞏ3ꞏ
of the DIP switch and it depends on the total length of the bus. Using the following illustrative
values; assigning other values may cause communication errors due to signal distortion.
DS ꞏ2ꞏ DSꞏ3ꞏ Speed Length of the CAN bus.
on on 1000 kHz Up to 20 meters.
off on 800 kHz From 20 to 40 meters.
on off 500 kHz From 40 to 100 meters.
off off 250 kHz From 100 to 500 meters.

The speed of 250 kHz is only available to communicate with the keyboards, RIOW and RIOW
series remote modules; this speed is not available at the RIO5 series remote modules.

In order for any change of speed to be assumed, the corresponding module must be reset;
however, we recommend to change the speed while the modules and the CNC are off.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ266ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

14 OP PANEL-A / OP PANEL+SPDL RATE-A.

The machine manufacturer must comply with the EN 60204-1 (IEC-204-1) regulation regarding
electrical shocks in case of defective input/output pins with external power supply when not plugging
the connector before turning the power supply on.

Module. Description.

14.
OP PANEL-A CAN operator panel 420 mm (16.54") with spindle override.
Possibility to connect up to three electronic handwheels.

OP PANEL+SPDL RATE-A CAN Operator panel 420 mm (16.54") with spindle override switch.

OP PANEL-A / OP PANEL+SPDL RATE-A.


Possibility to connect up to three electronic handwheels.

OP PANEL-A

OP PANEL+SPDL RATE-A

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ267ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

14.1 Specifications.

Type. Description.

General. • Jog switch (0 - 200 %).


• 16 configurable user keys.
• 15 configurable jog keys.
• Speed override key (OP-PANEL).
• Speed override switch (OP-PANEL+SPDL RATE).

14.
• Three Ø16.3 mm pre-drilled holes protected by a plug.
• CNC power-down key.
• Dimensions (width x height x depth)
- 420 × 175 × 64 mm.
OP PANEL-A / OP PANEL+SPDL RATE-A.
Specifications.

- 16.54" × 6.89" × 2.52".

Operating • Equipment for indoor use in non-hazardous locations, operated by qualified


conditions. personnel skilled in its use.
• The equipment must be installed in an enclosure that meets the requirements
described in this manual.
• Equipment designed for use in fixed locations.
• Equipment not suitable for wet areas.
• Never use in explosive environments (dangerous areas).

Regulations. • It complies with the European directives for electromagnetic compatibility


2014/30/EU and low voltage 2014/35/EU. See the declaration of conformity,
available on our website.
• UL 61010-1 (Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for
Me a s u r e m e n t , C o n t r o l , a n d L a b o r a t o r y U s e - Pa r t 1: G e n e r a l
Requirements). See the certificate, available on our website.
• IEC/UL 61010-2-201 (Safety requirements for elecrical equipement for
measurement, control and laboratory use. Particular requirements for
control equipment).
• Canadian Standards Associations: CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control
Equipement).

Packaging. • The package meets the regulation EN 60068-2-32 procedure 1 with a


random fall from a height not greater than 1 m.
Ambient. • Storage and transport temperature according to IEC 61131-2:
- Between -40 ºC (-40 ºF) and +70 ºC (158 ºF).
• Work temperature according to IEC 61131-2:
- Between 5 ºC (41 ºF) and 55 ºC (131 ºF).
• Temperature outside cabinet according to IEC 61131-2:
- Between 5 ºC (41 ºF) and 45 ºC (113 ºF).
• Temperature inside the enclosure:
- Less than 55 ºC (131 ºF).
• Relative humidity according to IEC 61131-2:
- 20 ~ 85% RH without condensation.
• Maximum work altitude:
- The unit must work properly at 2000 m according to IEC 61131-2.
• Vibration test according to IEC 60068-2-6 with a frequency step of
1 octave/minute (±10%) and a duration of 10 sweeps.
- 5 Hz  f  8.4 Hz; movement of constant 3.5 mm amplitude (peak value).
- 8.4 Hz  f  150 Hz; 1g acceleration and constant amplitude (peak value).
• Degree of protection according to EN 60529:
- IP65 (front).
• Pollution degree 2 according to IEC/UL 61010-1.

Electrical. • Connection to mains supply: Permanent.


• Operating conditions: Continuous.
CNCelite • Protection against electric shock: Class III (PE connection is only for
functional earthing).
8058 8060 • OVC I protection level according to IEC/UL 61010-1.
8065 8070 Power supply. • Use a regulated 24 V DC power supply (between -15% and +20%) and 2 A
(including voltage ripple and noise). The power supply must meet the
UL1950 standard.
REF: 2305
Connectivity. • Connection to the central unit through CAN bus (CANopen).
• Three handwheels with A and B signals (5 V DC TTL).

ꞏ268ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

14.1.1 Conditions of acceptabity.

• This equipment is for indoor use in non-hazardous locations, operated by qualified


personnel skilled in its use.
• The equipement shall be supplied with the specified rated voltages according to the
hardware manual.
• The nature of the installation where it is connected must not exceed OVC II.
• The equipment fullfils the requirements of the tested standars only if it is operated

14.
according to the hardware manual.
• The end application has to fulfill the requirements for resistance to mechanical stresses.
• To meet IP 54, the system must be installed in an appropiate enclosure according to the

OP PANEL-A / OP PANEL+SPDL RATE-A.


Specifications.
hardware manual.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ269ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

14.2 General diagram.

CNC OP PANEL-A
OP PANEL+SPDL RATE-A

CAN

14.
OP PANEL-A / OP PANEL+SPDL RATE-A.
General diagram.

CNC OP PANEL-A
OP PANEL+SPDL RATE-A

CAN

Connection. Description.

CAN Communication with CNC.


Maximum length: 500 m (1640 ft).

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ270ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

14.3 Dimensions.

c a

Db b 14.

OP PANEL-A / OP PANEL+SPDL RATE-A.


Dimensions.
Da

mm inch mm inch

a 420 16.54 Da 386 15.20


b 175 6.89 Db 143 5.63

c 34.15 1.35

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ271ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

14.4 Enclosure and mounting of the module.

14.4.1 Ambient characteristics of the enclosure.

The enclosure must be designed to ensure an ambient temperature of 45 ºC (113 ºF) and
while the unit is running, the inside temperature of the CNC must not exceed 60 ºC (140 ºF).

14. 14.4.2 Enclosure design.

Before building an enclosure with glass fiber u another poor heat dissipating material, contact Fagor
i
OP PANEL-A / OP PANEL+SPDL RATE-A.
Enclosure and mounting of the module.

Automation.

The enclosure must meet the following requirements:


• Protection degree: IP 54 minimun (according to EN 60529).
• Protection degree: IK 08 minimun (according to IEC 62262).
• Enclosures complying with UL 50 and/or UL 50E and CSA C22.2 Nos. 94.1 or 94.3 for
the intended application, need not be subjected to the applicable requirements in this
standard. Non-metallic materials of enclosures complying with the above standards,
relied upon for containment of fire within the equipment, shall have a minimun
flammability rating of V-1.
• The enclosure must have enough surface area to evacuate by convection the heat
generated inside.
• The enclosure must respect the minimum distances recommended between the
enclosure walls and the central unit to let the air flow and improve heat dissipation.
• In the connector area, reserve a space that allows the cables to be connected, respecting
their radius of curvature.
• Keep the enclosure clean.

Dimensions of the cut off part and the enclosure.

e
k d

W G

H
R G
k

F F F

General tolerance for W and H = ±0.5 mm (0.02 inches). D


Tolerance for d = ±0.2 mm (0.0079 inches).
Maximum radius of the corners = 5 mm (0.2 inches).

CNCelite mm inch mm inch

8058 8060 W 392 15.43 D (*) 65 2.56

8065 8070 H 147 5.79 e 1.5 - 4 0.06 - 0.16

F 135 5.31 (*) Minimum recommended distance.

G 80 3.15
REF: 2305
k 6.5 0.26

d Ø 4,8 Ø 0.19

ꞏ272ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

14.4.3 Securing the module.

The module must be installed in a proper enclosure that may be located on the machine or
on an external support. To insert the unit into the enclosure, it must have a big enough hole
to allow to insert it easily, without obstacles and without forcing the unit. See "14.4.1 Ambient
characteristics of the enclosure." on page 272.

The module is mounted from inside the enclosure. Once the unit has been inserted into the
enclosure, secure it from the inside using the screws provided for this purpose. Apply a
tightening torque of 2.1 Nm.

14.

OP PANEL-A / OP PANEL+SPDL RATE-A.


Enclosure and mounting of the module.

7mm M4 socket head bolts for fixing the module. CNCelite


i 8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ273ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

14.5 Power supply for the module.

• Use a regulated 24 V DC power supply.


• The unit must be powered with class DVC A power supply with a SELV/PELV protection
output voltage.
• For all connections and terminals of electronic modules, use only power supplies that
provide SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) or PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage) output
voltages.

14. 24 V DC universal power supply, via Phoenix


connector. See "24 V DC voltage supply." on page 276.
OP PANEL-A / OP PANEL+SPDL RATE-A.
Power supply for the module.

24 V DC

Connector pinout.
Plug-in part. 3-pole Phoenix-type combicon connector (7.62 mm
pitch).

Pin Signal. Function.


1 Chassis.

2 GND 0 V reference signal.


1
3 +24 V Power supply.

14.6 Hardware functionalities.

14.6.1 Ground connection.

It is up to the system integrator to meet all the requirements of local and national electrical codes as
well as all the regulations applicable regarding the grounding of the whole unit.

Ground connection.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ274ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

14.6.2 Rear connectors.

H G
C C
F

E
D
14.

OP PANEL-A / OP PANEL+SPDL RATE-A.


Hardware functionalities.
B
A

(A) 24 V DC voltage supply.


(B) Handwheels.
(C) CAN bus.
(D) Bus switch and transmission speed (CANopen).
(E) Address (node) of the element.
(F) Line terminating resistor.
(G) ERR led, transmission status indicator.
(H) RUN led, module status indicator.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ275ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

24 V DC voltage supply.
Plug-in part. 3-pole Phoenix-type combicon connector (7.62 mm
pitch).

Pin Signal. Function.


1 Chassis.

2 GND 0 V reference signal.


1
3 +24 V Power supply.

14.
Connector data.
Number of poles. 3.
Pitch. 7,62 mm.
Connection technique. Screw connection.
OP PANEL-A / OP PANEL+SPDL RATE-A.
Hardware functionalities.

Minimum/maximum tightening torque. 0.5 / 0.6 Nm.


Minimum/maximum section. 0.2 / 2.5 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 24 / 12.
Rated current In. 12 A.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped. 7 mm.

See "14.5 Power supply for the module." on page 274.

Handwheel connection.
Plug-in part. 10-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector
(3.5 mm pitch).

Pin. Signal. Function.


1 +5 VC 5 V DC voltage supply.
2 I1 ---
3 I2 ---
4 I3 B signal of the third handwheel.
5 I4 A signal of the third handwheel.
6 I5 B signal of the second handwheel.
7 I6 A signal of the second handwheel.
8 I7 B signal of the first handwheel.
9 I8 A signal of the first handwheel.
10 GNDC Power supply.

Connector data.
Number of poles. 10.
Pitch. 3,5 mm.
Connection technique. Spring connection.
Minimum/maximum section. 0.2 / 1.5 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 24 / 16.
Rated current In. 8 A.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped. 7 mm.

Cable shields must be connected to the ground plate. See "14.7 Handwheel connection." on page 279.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ276ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

CAN bus.
Plug-in part. 5-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm
pitch).

Pin. Signal. Function.


1 GND Ground / 0 V.
2 CL (LOW) bus signal.
3 SH CAN shield.
4 CH (HIGH) bus signal.
5 SH CAN shield.

Connector data.
Number of poles. 5.
14.
Pitch. 3,5 mm.

OP PANEL-A / OP PANEL+SPDL RATE-A.


Hardware functionalities.
Connection technique. Screw connection.
Minimum/maximum tightening torque. 0.22 / 0.25 Nm.
Minimum/maximum section. 0.14 / 1.5 mm².
Minimum/maximum AWG section. 28 / 16.
Rated current In. 8 A.

Cable data.
Length to be stripped. 7 mm.

See "14.8 Connecting the emergency stop button" on page 280.

CAN bus. CAN bus type selection (CANopen).


Switch 1 of the DIP switch selects the CAN bus type.
DS ꞏ1ꞏ Type of CAN bus.
off Not being used.
on CANopen bus.

CAN bus. Selecting the speed for the CANopen bus.


When using the CANopen protocol, the transmission speed at
the bus is defined in each node and they all must run at the
same speed. The transmission speed is selected using
switches 2 and 3 of the DIP switch and it depends on the total
length of the BUS. Using the following illustrative values;
assigning other values may cause communication errors due
to signal distortion.
DS ꞏ2ꞏ DSꞏ3ꞏ Speed. Length of the CAN bus.
on on 1000 kHz Up to 20 meters.
off on 800 kHz From 20 to 40 meters.
on off 500 kHz From 40 to 100 meters.
off off 250 kHz From 100 to 500 meters.

CAN bus. Address (node) of the element within the bus (16-31).
The 4 switch of the DIP switch allows for up to 32 positions or
elements to be integrated in the CAN bus. CNCelite
DS ꞏ4ꞏ Address (node) of the element.
8058 8060
off Positions 0-15 within the bus. 8065 8070
on Positions 16-31 within the bus.

REF: 2305

ꞏ277ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

CAN bus. Address (node) of the element within the bus (0-15).
Each one of the elements integrated into the CAN bus is
identified by the 16-position rotary switch (0-15) "Address"
(also referred to as "Node_Select"). The CNC must always
occupy position "0" and the rest of the elements of the bus will
occupy consecutive positions starting with 1.

14. The "Address" switch also sets the priority of the node within the bus; the lower the number
the higher the priority. We recommend the keyboard and jog panel to be the last nodes of
the bus.
OP PANEL-A / OP PANEL+SPDL RATE-A.
Hardware functionalities.

CAN bus. Line terminating resistor (LT switch)


The ꞏLTꞏ switch identifies which are the elements that occupy
the ends of the CAN bus; i.e. the first and last physical element
in the connection. The terminating elements must have the
resistor activated (position 1) but not the rest of the elements
(position 0).

RUN Led. Module status.


Green LED. The meaning depends on the blinking frequency.
Blinking rate. Description.
Intermittent. Module in PRE-OPERATIONAL state.
Single blinking. Module in STOPPED state.
On. Module in OPERATIONAL state.

Led ERR. Transmission status.


Red LED. The meaning depends on the blinking frequency.
Blinking rate. Description.
Off. The module is ready to run.
Intermittent. Module configuration stage.
Single blinking. Poor transmission. At least one of the error
counters of the CAN controller has reached
the alarm level.
Double blinking. There is no communication with the cpu.
On Error. The CAN controller is in "Bus Off"
state.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ278ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

14.7 Handwheel connection.

The keyboard admits the connection of up to 3 handwheels (MPG1, MPG2 and MPG3) with
A and B signals (5 V DC TTL). If he handwheel has an axis selector button, the button signal
may be connected to a digital input and may be managed from the PLC using the
NEXTMPGAXIS mark.

Connector pinout.
Plug-in part. 10-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon
connector (3.5 mm pitch).
14.

OP PANEL-A / OP PANEL+SPDL RATE-A.


Handwheel connection.
Pin. Signal. Function.
1 +5 VC 5 V DC voltage supply.
2 I1 ---
3 I2 ---
4 I3 B signal of the third handwheel.
5 I4 A signal of the third handwheel.
6 I5 B signal of the second handwheel.
7 I6 A signal of the second handwheel.
8 I7 B signal of the first handwheel.
9 I8 A signal of the first handwheel.
10 GNDC Power supply.

Cable characteristics.
The cable being used must have overall shield. The unshielded portion of the wires of an
unshielded cable cannot be longer than 75 mm.

Connection.
We recommend to run the handwheel cable as far away as possible from the power cables
of the machine.

Always connect the shield of the cable to the ground plate using a metallic clamp.

Handwheel cable.

Cable shield.

Ground plate.
CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ279ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

14.8 Connecting the emergency stop button

The operator panel supports the connection of an emergency stop button.

14.
OP PANEL-A / OP PANEL+SPDL RATE-A.
Connecting the emergency stop button

Emergency stop button connector.


Pin Function.
11 + 12 Normally closed.
X1 + X2 Not connected.
21 + 22 Normally closed.

Connector data.
Contact type. 2 x NC (Normally closed)
Working voltage. 250 V AC / 240 V DC
Maximum current. 2,5 A (AC / DC)
Pins. 2.8 x 0.8 mm flat terminal, soldered (350 ºC / 5s)
Manufacturer / Reference RAFI / 1.15.105.001/0000
Operational life (operations) / B10 15,000 cycles.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ280ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

14.9 CAN Bus (CANopen protocol).

CANopen is a network communication protocol based on the CAN bus for connecting the
CNC with remote modules and keyboards. The CAN connection supports up to 32 devices
(nodes), including the central unit; more one than keyboard and several groups of remote
modules are possible.

CAN connector.
Plug-in part. 5-pole Phoenix-contact minicombicon connector (3.5 mm
pitch).

Pin. Signal. Function.


14.

OP PANEL-A / OP PANEL+SPDL RATE-A.


CAN Bus (CANopen protocol).
1 GND Ground / 0 V.
2 CL (LOW) bus signal.
3 SH CAN shield.
4 CH (HIGH) bus signal.
5 SH Not being used.

The cable shield must be connected to the connector at both ends. The connector has two
shield pins. Both pins are equivalent; the CAN shield may be connected to either one.

Characteristics of the CAN cable.


Use a specific CAN cable. The ends of all the wires and the shield must be protected by the
corresponding terminal (pin). Also use the terminals (pins) to secure the cable to the
connector.

General characteristics.

Type. Shielded. Twisted pair (1 x 2 x 0.22 mm²).

Flexibility. Extremely flexible. Minimum bending radius, static = 50 mm and


dynamic = 95 mm.

Cover. PUR

Impedance. Cat.5 (100 - 120 )

Interconnection of modules.
Respect the cable's minimum bending radius when connecting it. They must be connected
in series; on elements having two CAN connectors, either one may be used. Once the
elements have been connected, define their logic order in the bus and the transmission
speed.

CNC JOG PANEL MODULE 1 MODULE 2

BCD B CD BCD BCD

ADDRESS = 0 ADDRESS = 3 ADDRESS = 1 ADDRESS = 2


F0 1

F0 1

F0 1

F0 1
78 9

78 9

78 9

78 9

3 45 34 5 34 5 34 5

ADD MSB = 0 ADD MSB = 0


Line Term = 1 Line Term = 0 Line Term = 0 Line Term = 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

X2 X2 X2
ISO GND ISO GND ISO GND ISO GND
CAN L CAN L CAN L CAN L
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD
CAN H CAN H CAN H CAN H
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD CNCelite
X3 X3 X3
8058 8060
ISO GND ISO GND ISO GND 8065 8070
CAN L CAN L CAN L
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD
CAN H CAN H CAN H
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD REF: 2305

The drawing shows the CAN connection between the CPU (central unit), the operator panel and 2
groups of RIOR or RIO5 series remote modules.

ꞏ281ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

14.9.1 Module identification at the bus.

Each one of the elements integrated into the CAN bus is identified by its address or node
number. The CNC must always occupy position "0" and the rest of the elements of the bus
will occupy consecutive positions starting with 1. The node address or number also sets the
priority of the group within the bus; the lower the number the higher the priority. We
recommend to set the priority of the groups as follows (from highest to lowest).
• The groups that have the feedback inputs.
• The groups that have analog inputs and outputs.

14. • The groups that have digital inputs and outputs.


• The keyboard and jog panel
OP PANEL-A / OP PANEL+SPDL RATE-A.
CAN Bus (CANopen protocol).

In order for any change in the identification of the module to take effect, the CNC must be
restarted and the corresponding drive must be turned off/reset, however, we recommend to
change the address while the modules and the CNC are turned off.

Configuring the address (node number).

Address (node) of the element within the bus (0-15).


Each one of the elements integrated into the CAN bus is
identified by the 16-position rotary switch (0-15) "Address"
(also referred to as "Node_Select").

Address (node) of the element within the bus (16-31).

The 4 switch of the DIP switch allows for up to 32 positions or elements to be integrated in
the CAN bus.
DS ꞏ4ꞏ Address (node) of the element.
off Positions 0-15 within the bus.
on Positions 16-31 within the bus.

ADDRESS = 2 ADDRESS = 18
BCD BCD
89 A

89 A
EF 2

EF 2

ADDRESS = 2 ADDRESS = 2
01

01
67

67

34 5 345

ID4 = 0 ID4 = 1
ID3 ID3
ID2 ID2
ID1 ID1
ON ON

ADDRESS 0 1 2 3 ꞏꞏꞏ 13 14 15

DS4 = 0 0 1 2 3 ꞏꞏꞏ 13 14 15

CNCelite DS4 = 1 16 17 18 19 ꞏꞏꞏ 29 30 31

8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ282ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

14.9.2 Identification of the first and last elements of the bus. Line terminating
resistor.

In the CAN bus, it is necessary to use a line terminating resistor to identify which are the
elements that occupy the ends of the bus; i.e. the first and last physical element in the
connection. For the central unit, the terminating resistor is factory installed because the CNC
is always at one end of the bus.
For all other elements, the LT switch identifies which elements
are being used at then ends of the CAN BUS; in other words,
the first and last physical element in the connection. The
terminating elements must have the resistor activated (position
1) but not the rest of the elements (position 0).
14.

OP PANEL-A / OP PANEL+SPDL RATE-A.


CAN Bus (CANopen protocol).
14.9.3 CAN bus type selection (CANopen).

Switch 1 of the DIP switch selects the CAN bus type.


DS ꞏ1ꞏ Type of CAN bus.
off Not being used.
on CANopen bus.

14.9.4 Selecting the speed for the CANopen bus.

When using the CANopen protocol, the transmission speed at the bus is defined in each node
and they all must run at the same speed. The transmission speed is selected using switches
2 and 3 of the DIP switch and it depends on the total length of the BUS. Using the following
illustrative values; assigning other values may cause communication errors due to signal
distortion.
DS ꞏ2ꞏ DSꞏ3ꞏ Speed Length of the CAN bus.
on on 1000 kHz Up to 20 meters.
off on 800 kHz From 20 to 40 meters.
on off 500 kHz From 40 to 100 meters.
off off 250 kHz From 100 to 500 meters.

The speed of 250 kHz is only available to communicate with the keyboards and RIOW and
RIOR series remote modules; this speed is not available for the RIO5 series remote modules.

In order for any change of speed to be assumed, the corresponding module must be reset;
however, we recommend to change the speed while the modules and the CNC are off.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ283ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

14.
OP PANEL-A / OP PANEL+SPDL RATE-A.
CAN Bus (CANopen protocol).

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ284ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

15 CNC-FPS.

• Read the manufacturer's instructions accompanying the product carefully before using the UPS.
• Use the UPS to power the central unit; DO NOT power any other device.
• Do not dispose of the UPS in fire.
• Do not short-circuit the terminals of the battery.

If there is an unexpected power failure, the UPS prevents an unexpected shutdown of the

15.
CNC. The UPS provides the central unit sufficient time to save data onto the FRAM and
execute the shutdown sequence.

CNC-FPS.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ285ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

15.1 Specifications.

Type. Description.

General. • Uninterruptible Power Supply with integrated battery.


• Dimensions (width x height x depth)
- 120.1 × 169.2 × 135.7 mm.
- 4.72" × 6.66" × 5.34".
• Weight.

15.
- 3,8 kg (8,3 lb).
• Do not throw used batteries into the trash. The batteries must be
disposed of in accordance with the applicable national regulations.

Input data • Rated input voltage: 24 V DC.


CNC-FPS.
Specifications.

• Input voltage margin: 18 V DC ~ 30 V DC.


• Current absorption: 14 A.
• Charge time: 24 hours.

Output data. Network operation.


• Rated output voltage: 24 V DC.
• Output voltage range: 18 V DC ~ 30 V DC (UOUT = UBAT - 0,5).
(depending on input voltage).
• Rated output current: 10 A (permanent).
• Power Boost: 15 A (permanent).
Output data. Battery operation.
• Rated output voltage: 24 V DC.
• Output voltage range: 19.2 V DC ~ 27.6 V DC.
(depending on battery voltage).
• Rated output current: 10 A (permanent).
• Power Boost: 15 A (permanent).
• Time buffer (IOUT=IN): 180 min (1 A) / 10 min (10 A).
Ambient. • Degree of pollution: 2.
• Degree of protection: IP20
• Protection class: Class III
• Ambient temperature (service):
- Between 0 ºC (32 ºF) and 40 ºC (104 ºF).
• Ambient temperature (storage/transport):
- Between -15 ºC (5 ºF) and 40 ºC (104 ºF).
• Humidity at 25 ºC (5 ºF) non condensing:
- ≤ 95 %.

15.2 Dimensions.

CNCelite
8058 8060 c a
8065 8070
mm inch
REF: 2305 a 120.1 4.72

b 169.2 6.66

c 135.7 5.34

ꞏ286ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

15.3 Securing the module.

When attaching the UPS, the following requirements must be met.


• Place the UPS in a vertical position.
• Place the UPS on a profile, according to EN 60715 (NS 35) standard. Attach the modules
using two fastening caps (one on each side of the module) to immobilize the module.
• Always leave clearance around the UPS for ventilation and later handling. Refer to the
data sheet that comes with the product for further information on the assembly of the
UPS.
15.

CNC-FPS.
Securing the module.
15.4 Protection fuse.

One defective or blown fuse can only be replaced by another of the same type.
Do not remove the fuse and/or connection of the battery in HazLoc conditions.

To transport the UPS, the fuse must be removed.


i
In order to protect the connected units, the UPS is fitted with a DC fuse in the battery
compartment. To protect the UPS during transport and/or prevent the accidental discharge
of the battery, the fuse is not installed at the factory. The fuse must be installed before starting
up the UPS. To insert or remove the fuse, follow these instructions.
1 Press the fastening buttons in the battery compartment.
2 Carefully remove the cover from the battery compartment.
3 Fit the fuse.
4 Reinstall the cover of the battery compartment.

2 4 3

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ287ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

15.5 UPS connection diagram.

Jumper terminals.
• The R1-R2 terminals are jumpered at the factory: to connect the UPS to the CNC, the
jumper must be removed.
• The 13-23-33-24V terminals are jumpered at the factory: to connect the UPS to the CNC,
there is no need to remove the jumper.

15. Maintain.
CNC-FPS.
UPS connection diagram.

Remove.

Connection to the CNC and to the power supply.

UPS. CNC.

I65
14 BAT_MODE
24 DISABLE_BAT
34 DISABLE_BAT
R1
24 V power supply. R2

Output. A22
Output. Input. + 24 V

+ + – GND

– –

The R1-R2 connector of the UPS is a free of potential relay. Both signals can go to any
DISABLE_BAT pin of the CNC (never both signals to the same pin).

Cable characteristics.
CNCelite
8058 8060 Cable data.
8065 8070 Minimum/maximum tightening torque. 0.5 / 0.6 Nm.

Minimum/maximum section. 1.5 / 2.5 mm².

REF: 2305 Minimum/maximum AWG section. 16 / 12.


Length to be stripped. 7 mm.
(use ferrules on flexible wires/cables).

ꞏ288ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

Meaning of the LEDs.

15.

CNC-FPS.
UPS connection diagram.
LED. Meaning.

Battery charge level.

Red LED.
• LED on. UPS alarm for one of these reasons.
- Battery almost empty.
- No battery detected.
- The battery needs to be replaced.
• LED off. The UPS is working properly, with no alarms and is charged.

Yellow LED
• LED on: UPS in battery mode, supplying power.
• LED off: UPS not in battery mode, supplying power.
Green LED.
• LED on: The UPS is receiving power.
• LED off: The UPS is not receiving power.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ289ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

15.
CNC-FPS.
UPS connection diagram.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ290ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

16 CNC FPS-CAP.

• Before installing this module, carefully read the manufacturer's instructions supplied with the
product.
• Only use the "CNC FPS-CAP" to power the CNC; do not power any other device.
• The capacitors are charged at each start-up. During the charging time (22 minutes), the module
does not provide power failure protection.
• After disconnecting the capacity module from the power supply, the module can retain residual
voltage/charge.
• For transport, the capacity module must be completely discharged.

The "CNC FPS-CAP" module is a double-layer capacitor-based UPS unit, which provides
16.

CNC FPS-CAP.
protection against power failures and thus prevents the CNC from shutting down
unexpectedly. In the event of a power failure, this module powers the CNC for the time
necessary to save the data and execute the shutdown sequence.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ291ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

16.1 Specifications.

Type. Description.

General. • Capacitive uninterruptible power supply system.


• The module is maintenance-free and must not be opened.
• Dimensions (width x height x depth)
- 118 × 130 × 125 mm.
- 4.64 × 5.11 × 4.92 in.

16.
• Weight.
- 1,6 kg (3,5 lb).

Input data • Rated input voltage: 24 Vdc (SELV).


• Input voltage margin: 22.5 Vdc ~ 30 Vdc.
CNC FPS-CAP.
Specifications.

• Current consumption (nominal): 13.5 A.


• Charge time: 22 minutes.
• Recharge time: 12 minutes.

Output data. Network operation.


• Rated output voltage: 24 Vdc.
• Rated output current: 10 A.
• Boost.Stat: 12.5 A.

Output data. Buffer mode.


• Rated output voltage: 22 Vdc.
• Rated output current: 10 A.
• Boost.Stat: 12.5 A.
• Buffer time: 5 min (1 A) / 30 seconds (10 A).

Ambient. • Degree of pollution: 2.


• Degree of protection: IP20
• Protection class: Class III
• Ambient temperature (service):
- Between -25 ºC (77 ºF) and 60 ºC (140 ºF).
• Ambient temperature (storage/transport):
- Between -40 ºC (-40 ºF) and 50 ºC (140 ºF).
• Maximum permissible relative humidity:
- ≤ 95 %.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ292ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

16.2 Dimensions.

16.

CNC FPS-CAP.
Dimensions.
c a

mm inch

a 118 4.64

b 130 5.11

c 125 4.92

16.3 Securing the module.

Ensure that there is sufficient distance above and below the module to allow the heat generated to
dissipate by convection. The housing may become hot.

When attaching the module, the following requirements must be met.


• Place the module in a vertical position, with the connectors facing upwards.
• The module must be installed inside an electrical cabinet with a protection rating of IP54
or higher (EN 60529 compliant). Place the module on a profile, according to EN 60715
(NS 35) standard.
• Always leave a space above and below the module for ventilation and subsequent
handling. Refer to the data sheet that comes with the product for further information on
the assembly.

50 mm

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

50 mm

ꞏ293ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

How to secure the module.

16.
CNC FPS-CAP.
Securing the module.

How to detach the module.

• Switch off the power supply before detaching the module.


• Disconnect all cables before detaching the module.

1
1
2

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ294ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

16.4 Connection to the CNC.

Do not connect test plugs to the "Signal" connector. The maximum plug-in depth of the push-in
terminals is limited. In addition, when the test plug is plugged in, the unlocking button (push button)
is covered and unlocking is not possible or inadequate. If you do not push the release button all the
way down when pulling out the test plug, the connector will be damaged.

16.
Connection to the CNC and to the power supply.

24 Vdc Power Supply CNC

CNC FPS-CAP.
Connection to the CNC.
DISABLE_BAT
DISABLE_BAT
BAT_MODE
GND
Output.

24 V
+ –
A22 I65

+ – + –
Input. Output.
DC 24 V DC 24 V 10 A

Signal.
13
UIN OK
14
Alarm
Ready
Remote
SGnd

CNC FPS-CAP

Connector information.

Connector data.

Connection technique. Screw connection.


Minimum/maximum tightening torque. 0.5 / 0.6 Nm.

Minimum/maximum section. 1.5 / 2.5 mm².

Minimum/maximum AWG section. 16 / 12.


Length to be stripped. 6,5 mm.
(use ferrules on flexible wires/cables). CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ295ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

Meaning of the LED's.

16.
CNC FPS-CAP.
Connection to the CNC.

LED. Meaning.

Red LED.
LED on when the module is in alarm status. Possible alarms include:
• Over-temperature.
• Error in the storage capacitor.
• Disconnection in the event of overload in buffer mode.

Green LED.
LED on when the capacitors are charged or the module is in buffer
mode.
Green LED.
LED on when the input supply voltage is in the valid range.

Meaning of the LEDs during operation.

LED. Meaning.

UIn OK Ready Alarm


off off off Module switched off.

on on on Start-up, testing the LEDs (~3 seconds).

on off Network operation, the buffer is ready. The state of charge of the
capacitor is above the "Ready" threshold.
off Network operation, charging the capacitor. The state of charge
flashing of the capacitor is below the "Ready" threshold.
on
50 %
on Network operation, alarm. The state of charge of the capacitor
is below the "Ready" threshold.

on on Network operation, alarm. The state of charge of the capacitor


is above the "Ready" threshold.

on off Buffer mode.

on on Buffer mode. Alarm due to overtemperature > 70 ºC.


off
off on Buffer mode. Alarm.

off on Buffer mode. Alarm.

flashing on off Network operation, "Remote" pin shorted to "SGnd". The buffer
90 % is ready.

flashing off Network operation, "Remote" pin shorted to "SGnd". Charging


CNCelite in progress.
50 %
8058 8060
flashing flashing off Network operation, "Remote" pin shorted with "SGnd" or output
8065 8070 10 % 50 % delay enabled. Charge in process or capacitor fully charged.

flashing on Network operation, "Remote" pin shorted with "SGnd" or output


50 % delay enabled. Charge in process or "Ready". Alarm.
REF: 2305

ꞏ296ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

17 INSTALLING A SENSOR FOR GAP CONTROL (LASER


MODEL).

The analog input for the sensor can be installed in remote CAN or EtherCAT modules. Use
the machine parameters GAPANAINTYPE and GAPANAINID to define the CNC where the
sensor input is located.

Electrical diagram.

Connecting a sensor to an analog input on CAN remote modules.


17.

INSTALLING A SENSOR FOR GAP CONTROL (LASER MODEL).


The analog inputs are available on modules RIO5 and RIOR.

9 ANALOG INPUT -
AI1-
I48
11 ANALOG INPUT +
CAN AI1+

CNC RIOR GAP SENSOR

Connecting the sensor to an analog input on remote EtherCAT modules.

The analog inputs are available on modules RIOW-E and RIOR-E.

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ297ꞏ
Hardware configuration.

User notes:

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ298ꞏ
H a r d w a r e co n f ig u r a t i o n .

User notes:

CNCelite
8058 8060
8065 8070

REF: 2305

ꞏ299ꞏ
Fagor Automation S. Coop.
Bº San Andrés, 19 - Apdo. 144
E-20500 Arrasate-Mondragón, Spain
Tel: +34 943 039 800
Fax: +34 943 791 712
E-mail: contact@fagorautomation.es
www.fagorautomation.com

You might also like